WO2009089680A1 - Method of modulating membrane potential of a cell - Google Patents

Method of modulating membrane potential of a cell Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009089680A1
WO2009089680A1 PCT/CN2008/002027 CN2008002027W WO2009089680A1 WO 2009089680 A1 WO2009089680 A1 WO 2009089680A1 CN 2008002027 W CN2008002027 W CN 2008002027W WO 2009089680 A1 WO2009089680 A1 WO 2009089680A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substituted
alkylene
formula
hydrocarbyl
unsubstituted
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2008/002027
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Dan Yang
Xiang Li
Bing Shen
Xiao-Qiang Yao
Original Assignee
Dan Yang
Xiang Li
Bing Shen
Xiao-Qiang Yao
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Dan Yang, Xiang Li, Bing Shen, Xiao-Qiang Yao filed Critical Dan Yang
Priority to EP08871016.5A priority Critical patent/EP2231137B1/en
Priority to CN200880127474.5A priority patent/CN102170872B/en
Publication of WO2009089680A1 publication Critical patent/WO2009089680A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/16—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids
    • A61K31/165—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids having aromatic rings, e.g. colchicine, atenolol, progabide
    • A61K31/166—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids having aromatic rings, e.g. colchicine, atenolol, progabide having the carbon of a carboxamide group directly attached to the aromatic ring, e.g. procainamide, procarbazine, metoclopramide, labetalol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08—Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/12—Antihypertensives

Definitions

  • Membrane potential i.e., the electrical potential difference across the membrane of a living cell
  • Many important physiological processes such as neuronal signaling, muscle contraction, cardiovasculaer function and immune response, involve a change in membrane potential.
  • membrane potentials in cells depend on, inter alia, three factors: 1) the concentration of ions on the inside and outside of the cell; 2) the permeability of the cell membrane to those ions through specific ion channels; and 3) by the activity of electrogenic pumps that maintain the ion concentrations across the membrane. Therefore, ion channels that can selectively mediate the transfer of ions across the membrane of a cell may play a crucial role in establishing and controlling the membrane potential of the cell.
  • ion channels may control the membrane potential of a cell
  • the membrane potential in a reverse way, can regulate the functions of many ion channels, especially voltage-dependent ion channels.
  • a change in membrane potential caused by the opening of a certain ion channel may affect behaviors of other ion channels and induce an action cascade of them, e.g., the contraction of muscle cells.
  • abnormal membrane potential responses have been implicated in many severe human diseases such as hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features, generalised epilepsy with febrile seizures (GEFS+), generalised epilepsy with febrile and afebrile seizures, paramyotonia congenita, potassium-aggravated myotonia hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis or Brugada syndrome.
  • methods of modulating membrane potential of a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; and (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell.
  • the methods further comprise a step of imposing an anion gradient across the cell membrane.
  • methods of regulating a natural voltage-dependent ion channel in a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; and (c) regulating the natural voltage-dependent ion channel, wherein the self-assembling compound has formula (I) as defined herein.
  • the methods further comprise a step of imposing an anion gradient across the cell membrane.
  • the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent sodium channel, potassium channel or calcium channel.
  • the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent calcium channel.
  • a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; and (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell.
  • a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell; and (e) regulating the tension of the muscle cell.
  • vascular smooth muscle cell in another aspect, provided herein are methods of regulating a vascular tone comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the membrane of a vascular smooth muscle cell; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell; (e) regulating the tension of the vascular smooth muscle cell; and (f) regulating the vascular tone.
  • the cell is a muscle cell. In other embodiments, the cell is a smooth muscle cell. In further embodiments, the cell is a vascular smooth muscle cell. In still further embodiments, the natural voltage-dependent calcium channel is L-type calcium channel.
  • the anion is fluoride, chloride, bromide, iodide, nitrate, nitrite, sulfate, bisulfate, carbonate, bicarbonate, phosphate, hydrogen phosphate, dihydrogen phosphate or acetate.
  • the anion is chloride.
  • the anion channel is a chloride channel.
  • the anion gradient is a chloride gradient.
  • the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
  • a method of treating, managing or preventing a human disease that is related to the abnormal membrane potential responses comprising administering a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I) as defined below, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
  • the disease is hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features, generalised epilepsy with febrile seizures (GEFS+), generalised epilepsy with febrile and afebrile seizures, paramyotonia congenita, potassium-aggravated myotonia hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis or Brugada syndrome.
  • GEFS+ generalised epilepsy with febrile seizures
  • afebrile seizures paramyotonia congenita
  • potassium-aggravated myotonia hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis or Brugada syndrome generalised epilepsy with febrile and afebrile seizures
  • the disease is hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, or Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features.
  • the self-assembling compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or stereoisomer thereof is inserted into the lipid bilayer of a cell of the mammal.
  • the mammal is a human.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising the self-assembling compound having formula (I) as defined below, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical composition further comprises a carrier.
  • the pharmaceutical composition further comprises at least an ingredient selected from the group consisting of excipients, carriers, diluents, and combinations thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is in a single unit dosage form.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is in a single unit dosage form suitable for inserting into the lipid bilayer of a mammalian cell.
  • the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a the self-assembling compounds having formula (I):
  • Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon (e.g., alkane, alkene and alkyne), carbocycle (e.g., aliphatic carbocycle such as cyclohexane, or arene such as benzene) or heterocycle (e.g., heteroarene such as pyridine); and
  • an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon e.g., alkane, alkene and alkyne
  • carbocycle e.g., aliphatic carbocycle such as cyclohexane, or arene such as benzene
  • heterocycle e.g., heteroarene such as pyridine
  • H DA is a divalent group having the formula (II), (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE), (IV) or (IVB):
  • each of Z 1 and Z 2 is independently O, S or NR 1 ; each of A, B 2 , and D is independently O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-io alkylene; each of B'and B 3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci -I0 alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R and R is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of Bl and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
  • H D A of formula (I) is represented by formula (III):
  • k is an integer from 1 to 20;
  • A is O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I 0 alkylene where R 2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl;
  • B 1 is O or NH
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Ci -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • H DA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV):
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Ci -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • H DA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
  • A is O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci -I0 alkylene where R 2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl;
  • n of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is 1. In other embodiments, n is 2 or 3, and at least two of the X-H DA units are the same. In further embodiments, n is 2 or 3, and at least two of the X-H DA units are different.
  • X of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl.
  • X is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl comprising 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • X is alkyl or substituted alkyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • X is isobutyl.
  • Y of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted alkane, alkene or alkyne.
  • Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted C 2-I2 alkane, alkene or alkyne.
  • Y is unsubstituted or substituted propylene or propenylene.
  • Y of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic aromatic carbocycle.
  • Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted arene such as benzene.
  • Y of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic heterocycle.
  • Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted heteroarene such as pyridine.
  • H DA of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein comprises at least one primary amide or secondary amide group.
  • D of formula (II), (III), (IV) or (IVB) is Ci -3 alkylene substituted with at least an alkyl, aryl, substituted alkyl or substituted aryl group.
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene substituted with at least an isobutyl group.
  • D is methylene substituted with an isobutyl.
  • a of formula (II) or (III) is a bond; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1.
  • a of formula (II) or (III) is O; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1.
  • Y is arylene, heteroarylene, alkylene or alkenylene; and each X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is one of Examples 1-42, or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
  • the self-assembling compound is N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoe
  • FIG. 1 depicts some classifications of synthetic ion channels based on their structures or "designs.”
  • FIG. 2 depicts a synthetic ion channel across a lipid bilayer where the dashed lines represent hydrogen bonds and the thick solid lines represent self-assembling molecules, each of which comprises at least a hydrogen bond donor (represented by D) and at least a hydrogen bond acceptor (represented by A).
  • FIG. 3 depicts a possible anion transport process in the synthetic ion channel of FIG. 2 where the sphere represents an anion, the dashed lines represent hydrogen bonds and the thick solid lines represent self-assembling molecules, each of which comprises at least a hydrogen bond donor (represented by D) and at least a hydrogen bond acceptor (represented by A).
  • the anion forms a hydrogen bond individually and sequentially with each of the hydrogen bond donors along the synthetic ion channel when it passes through the channel.
  • FIG. 4a-d depict various chemical representations Example 2.
  • FIG. 4a depicts the chemical structure of Example 2.
  • FIG. 4b depicts the crystal structure of Example 2 in stick representation where carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen and oxygen atoms are represented by grey, white, blue and red sticks respectively.
  • Two eight-membered-ring intramolecular hydrogen bonds having a bond length of 2.13 A are shown as green dashed lines.
  • FIG. 4c and 4d depicts the top view and side view respectively of the solid-state packing of Example 2. The CH hydrogen atoms in FIG. 4c and 4d are omitted for clarity.
  • Intermolecular hydrogen bonds, shown as green solid lines in FIG. 4d link and align adjacent molecules together to form a pore-structure.
  • FIG. 5 shows chloride release mediated by Example 2 at different concentrations from large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs), where NaCl extra- and intravesicular buffers were used. The experimental details are described in Example 43.
  • LUVs large unilamellar vesicles
  • FIG. 6 shows Example 2 mediated electrolyte exchange in the presence of chloride but not in the presence of sulfate. The experimental details are described in Example 43.
  • FIG. 7 shows chloride transport ability of different synthetic ion channels derived from Examples 1-42 in LUVs, where NaCl extra- and intravesicular buffers were used.
  • FIG. 8 shows single-channel recording results illustrating that Example 2 can mediate chloride transport across lipid bilayer by an ion channel mechanism featuring voltage-dependent gating property. The experimental details are described in Example 44.
  • FIG. 9 shows whole-cell recording results illustrating that Example 2 can increase cell chloride currents when partitioned into human cell membranes. The experimental details are described in Example 45.
  • FIG. 10 shows the chloride transport activity of Example 2 in liposome with chloride-sensitive fluorescent indicator SPQ.
  • FIG. 11 shows the X-ray crystal structure of Example 2.
  • FIG. 12A depicts the change of membrane potential of a liposome after Example 2 was added to the liposome.
  • FIG. 12B shows the change of fluorescence intensity at different times (min) after Example 2 was added to the liposome.
  • FIG. 12C-12J shows the change of fluorescence intensity at different times (min) after Examples 10-42 were added to the liposome.
  • FIG. 13A depicts the change of membrane potential of a liposome after (1) valinomycin and (2) Example 2 were added to the liposome.
  • FIG. 13B shows the change of fluorescence intensity at different times (min) after the valinomycin and Example 2 were added to the liposome.
  • FIG. 14A-E depict the changes of fluorenscence intensity of the membrane potential of Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells at different times (min) after (A) 10 ⁇ M of foskolin; (B) 10 ⁇ M of Example 2; (C) 100 mL of CI " and 10 ⁇ M of Example 2; (D) 1 mM of diphenylamine-2-carboxylate (DPC) and 10 ⁇ M of Example 2; (E) 60 mM of Cl " , 1 mM of DPC, and 10 ⁇ M of Example 2, were added to the MDCK cells, respectively.
  • MDCK Madin-Darby canine kidney
  • FIG. 15A depicts the changes of the membrane potential of the A7r5 cells at different times (min) after the A7r5 cells are sequentially treatment with 60 mM K + solution and 10 ⁇ M of Example 2.
  • FIG. 16B depicts the changes Of [Ca 2+ ] of the A7r5 cells at different times (min) after the A7r5 cells are sequentially treatment with 60 mM K + solution, 1 ⁇ of Example 2, and 10 ⁇ M of Example 2.
  • FIG. 16A-B depict the changes of the membrane potential and [Ca 2+ ] respectively of the A7r5 cells at different times (min) after the A7r5 cells are sequentially treatment with 10 ⁇ M of Example 2 and 60 mM K + solution.
  • FIG. 17A-B shows the vasorelaxant effects of increasing the concentrations of Example 2 on mouse aorta preconstricted by (A) the 60 mM K + solution; and (B) the 10 ⁇ m of ⁇ -adrenergic agonist phenylephrine (PE) 5 respectively.
  • FIG. 17C depicts the relationships between the concentrations of Example 2 and the vasorelaxant effects on mouse aorta preconstricted by the 60 mM K + solution (•) and the 10 ⁇ M of PE (A), respectively.
  • pS means picoSiemens.
  • mM means millimolar
  • iiM means nanomolar.
  • Anion means a negatively-charged ion.
  • Bilayer membrane or "lipid bilayer” refers to a bimolecular thick assembly that forms the permeability barrier surrounding eukaryotic cells and plays a similar role in intracellular compartments, liposomes, and other organelles. This membrane is comprised of any of a large number of amphipathic lipid molecules but in cells it is primarily comprised of phospholipids.
  • Cell refers to prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, eukaryotic cell, plant cell, human cell, animal cell, and in one embodiment, a mammalian cell.
  • Membrane refers to a thin, semi-permeable barrier that separates two liquid phases which may have the same or different compositions.
  • Cell membrane refers to a selectively permeable lipid bilayer coated by proteins.
  • the cell membrane comprises the outer layer of a cell.
  • Channel or “ion channel” refers to an aqueous diffusion pathway for membrane impermeant compounds usually formed by a pore within a cell membrane permitting the transfer of neutral or ionic species through it from one side of the membrane to the other.
  • “Supramolecular assembly” refers to a well defined complex of molecules held together by noncovalent bonds such as van de Waals force or hydrogen bonds.
  • a supramolecular assembly can comprise two or more molecules.
  • the supramolecular assembly can be in any form or shape such as sphere, cylinder, disk, or sheet which can be solid or hallow. In some embodiments, the supramolecular assembly is in the form of hallow cylinder. In other embodiments, the supramolecular assembly is in the form of a channel with a pore.
  • the dimensions of supramolecular assemblies can range from nanometers to micrometers.
  • Self-assembly refers to the assembly of molecules without guidance or management from an outside source. There are generally two types of self-assembly, intramolecular self-assembly and intermolecular self-assembly. Intramolecular self-assembling molecules are generally complex polymers having the ability to assemble from the random coil conformation into a well-defined stable structure. Intermolecular self-assembly is the ability of molecules to form supramolecular assemblies.
  • Self-assembling compound or “self-assembling molecule” refers to the compound or molecule that can form a supramolecular assembly through a intermolecular self-assembly process.
  • Hydrogen bond donor refers to a group having at least one hydrogen atom attached to a strongly electronegative heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur.
  • Hydrogen bond acceptor refers to a strongly electronegative heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine, and bromine.
  • Liposome refers to an artificial sac, usually spherical, consisting of one (unilamellar) or more (multilamellar) bilayer membranes of phospholipid that encloses an aqueous core and in significant ways mimics biological membranes.
  • the term liposome is sometimes used interchangeably with “vesicle.”
  • "Unilamellar” refers to the bilayer membrane of phospholipid liposomes consists of a single layer.
  • Multilamellar refers to the bilayer membrane of phospholipid liposomes consists of more than one concentric layer, structurally analogous to an onion.
  • Selectivity refers to a measurable preference for one species over another, including cation over anion, anion over cation, one cation over a different cation, or one anion over a different anion.
  • Transport refers to the movement of an ion or other species across a membrane boundary.
  • Amino refers to a primary, secondary, or tertiary amine which may optionally be hydrocarbyl, substituted hydrocarbyl or heteroatom substituted. Specifically included are secondary or tertiary amine nitrogen atoms which are members of a heterocyclic ring. Also specifically included, for example, are secondary or tertiary amino groups substituted by an acyl moiety.
  • Alkyl refers to a fully saturated acyclic monovalent radical containing carbon and hydrogen, and which may be branched or a straight chain.
  • alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, n-heptyl, and isopropyl.
  • the alkyl groups described herein are preferably lower alkyl containing from one to ten carbon atoms in the principal chain and up to 20 carbon atoms, as exemplified by methyl, ethyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, t-butyl, isoamyl, n-pentyl, and isopentyl.
  • alkenyl refers to a monovalent or divalent unsaturated, preferably monounsaturated, radical containing carbon and hydrogen, and which may be cyclic, branched or a straight chain. Unless otherwise indicated, the alkenyl groups described herein are preferably lower alkyl containing from two to eight carbon atoms in the principal chain and up to 20 carbon atoms, as exemplified by ethenyl, propenyl, isopropenyl, butenyl, isobutenyl, hexenyl, and the like.
  • Alkynyl refers to a lower alkyl containing from two to eight carbon atoms in the principal chain and up to 20 carbon atoms. They may contain straight or branched chain, as exemplified by ethynyl, propynyl, isopropynyl, butynyl, isobutynyl, hexynyl, and the like.
  • Aromatic refers to aryl or heteroaryl.
  • Aryl refers to optionally substituted carbocyclic aromatic groups, preferably monocyclic or bicyclic groups containing from 6 to 12 carbon atoms in the ring portion, such as phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, substituted phenyl, substituted biphenyl or substituted naphthyl. Phenyl and substituted phenyl are the more preferred aryl.
  • Halogen or "halo” refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
  • Heteroatom shall mean atoms other than carbon and hydrogen.
  • Heterocyclo refers to optionally substituted, fully saturated or unsaturated, monocyclic or bicyclic, aromatic or nonaromatic groups having at least one heteroatom in at least one ring, and preferably 5 or 6 atoms in each ring.
  • the aromatic heterocyclyl (i.e., heteroaryl) group preferably has 1 or 2 oxygen atoms, 1 or 2 sulfur atoms, and/or 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms in the ring, and may be bonded to the remainder of the molecule through a carbon or heteroatom.
  • Non-limiting examples of heteroaryl include furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, oxazolyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl and the like.
  • substituents include one or more of the following groups: hydrocarbyl, substituted hydrocarbyl, keto, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, acyl, acyloxy, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, halogen, amido, amino, nitro, cyano, thiol, ketals, acetals, esters and ethers.
  • Hydrocarbyl refers to organic compounds or radicals consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen. Hydrocarbyl includes alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and aryl moieties. Hydrocarbyl also includes alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and aryl moieties substituted with other aliphatic, cyclic or aryl hydrocarbon groups, such as alkaryl, alkenaryl and alkynaryl. In some embodiments, "hydrocarbon” or “hydrocarbyl” comprises 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Hydrocarbon is a divalent group formed by removing two hydrogen atoms from a hydrocarbon, the free valencies of which are not engaged in a double bond, e.g. 1,3-phenylene, propane- 1,3-diyl, and methylene.
  • Substituted as used herein to describe a compound or chemical moiety means that at least one hydrogen atom of that compound or chemical moiety is replaced with a second chemical moiety.
  • the second chemical moiety can be any desired substituent that does not adversely affect the desired activity of the compound.
  • substituents are those found in the exemplary compounds and embodiments disclosed herein, as well as halogen; alkyl; heteroalkyl; alkenyl; alkynyl; aryl, heteroaryl, hydroxyl; alkoxyl; amino; nitro; thiol; thioether; imine; cyano; isocyanate, thioisocyanate, amido; phosphonato; phosphine; carboxyl; thiocarbonyl; sulfonyl; sulfonamide; ketone; aldehyde; ester; oxo; haloalkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl); carbocyclic cycloalkyl, which can be monocyclic or fused or non-fused polycyclic (e.g., cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl) or a heterocycloalkyl, which can be monocyclic
  • substituents can optionally be further substituted with a substituent selected from such groups. All chemical groups disclosed herein can be substituted, unless it is specified otherwise.
  • substituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, hydrocarbyl or heterocyclo moieties described herein are moieties which are substituted with a hydrocarbyl moiety, a substituted hydrocarbyl moiety, a heteroatom, or a heterocyclo.
  • substituents may include moieties in which a carbon atom is substituted with a heteroatom such as nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, phosphorus, boron, sulfur, or a halogen atom.
  • substituents may include halogen, heterocyclo, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, keto, acyl, acyloxy, nitro, amino, amido, cyano, thiol, ketals, acetals, esters and ethers.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” includes, but is not limited to, salts of acidic or basic groups that may be present in the compounds of the invention. Compounds of the invention that are basic in nature are capable of forming a wide variety of salts with various inorganic and organic acids.
  • acids that may be used to prepare pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such basic compounds are those that form salts comprising pharmacologically acceptable anions including, but not limited to, acetate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bitartrate, bromide, calcium edetate, camsylate, carbonate, chloride, bromide, iodide, citrate, dihydrochloride, edetate, edisylate, estolate, esylate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydroxynaphthoate, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, mesylate, methylsulfate, muscate, napsylate, nitrate, panthothenate, phosphate/diphosphate, polygalacturonate, sal
  • Compounds of the invention that include an amino group also can form pharmaceutically acceptable salts with various amino acids, in addition to the acids mentioned above.
  • Compounds of the invention that are acidic in nature are capable of forming base salts with various pharmacologically acceptable cations.
  • Non-limiting examples of such salts include alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salts and, particularly, calcium, magnesium, sodium, lithium, zinc, potassium, and iron salts.
  • Stepoisomer encompasses all enantiomerically/stereomerically pure and enantiomerically/stereomerically enriched compounds disclosed herein.
  • Steps ofmerically pure or “enantiomerically pure” means that a compound comprises one stereoisomer and is substantially free of its counter stereoisomer or enantiomer.
  • a compound is stereomerically or enantiomerically pure when the compound contains 80%, 90% or 95% or more of one stereoisomer and 20%, 10% or 5% or less of the counter stereoisomer.
  • a compound of the invention is considered optically active or stereomerically/enantiomerically pure (i.e., substantially the R-form or substantially the S-form) with respect to a chiral center when the compound is about 80% ee (enantiomeric excess) or greater, preferably, equal to or greater than 90% ee with respect to a particular chiral center and more preferably 95% ee with respect to a particular chiral center.
  • Hydrate means a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometeric amount of water bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces.
  • Solvate means a solvate formed from the association of one or more solvent molecules to a compound of the present invention.
  • solvate includes hydrates (e.g., mono-hydrate, dihydrate, trihydrate, tetrahydrate, and the like).
  • Polymorph means solid crystalline forms of a compound of the present invention or complex thereof. Different polymorphs of the same compound can exhibit different physical, chemical and /or spectroscopic properties.
  • methods of modulating membrane potential of a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; and (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell.
  • the methods further comprise a step of imposing an anion gradient across the cell membrane.
  • Also provided herein are methods of regulating a natural voltage-dependent ion channel in a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; and (c) regulating the natural voltage-dependent ion channel, wherein the self-assembling compound has formula (I) as defined herein.
  • the methods further comprise a step of imposing an anion gradient across the cell membrane.
  • the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent sodium channel, potassium channel or calcium channel.
  • the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent calcium channel.
  • Also provided herein are methods of regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of a cell comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; and (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell.
  • Also provided herein are methods of regulating the tension of a muscle cell comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell; and (e) regulating the tension of the muscle cell.
  • Also provided herein are methods of regulating a vascular tone comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the membrane of a vascular smooth muscle cell; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell; (e) regulating the tension of the vascular smooth muscle cell; and (f) regulating the vascular tone.
  • the cell used in the method disclosed herein is a muscle cell.
  • the cell is a smooth muscle cell.
  • the cell is a vascular smooth muscle cell.
  • the natural voltage-dependent calcium channel is L-type calcium channel.
  • the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
  • the anion used in the method disclosed herein is fluoride, chloride, bromide, iodide, nitrate, nitrite, sulfate, bisulfate, carbonate, bicarbonate, phosphate, hydrogen phosphate, dihydrogen phosphate or acetate.
  • the anion is chloride.
  • the anion channel is a chloride channel.
  • the anion gradient is a chloride gradient.
  • any self-assembling compound that can form a synthetic anion channel can be used for the methods disclosed herein.
  • the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I):
  • X-HDA- ⁇ Y (I) wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6;
  • Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon, carbocycle or heterocycle; and H DA is a divalent group having formula (II):
  • each of Z 1 and Z 2 is independently O, S or NR 1 ; each of A, B 1 , B 2 , B 3 and D is independently a bond, O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci -I0 alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R 1 and R 2 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of Bl and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
  • each of A, B 2 , and D is independently O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 - I0 alkylene; and each of B'and B 3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C MO alkylene.
  • HD A is a substituted hydrocarbylene comprising at least one hydrogen bond donor and at least one hydrogen bond acceptor.
  • the hydrogen bond donor comprises a hydrogen atom bonded directly to oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur.
  • the hydrogen bond acceptor is an oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine, or bromine atom.
  • H DA of formula (I) comprises at least one primary amide or secondary amide group.
  • n of formula (I) is 1. In other embodiments, n of formula (I) is 2, and the two X-H DA units are either the same or different.
  • X is a hydrocarbyl group such as alkyl, aryl, or aralkyl containing up to 18 carbon atoms, optionally substituted with an oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur containing moiety. In other embodiments, X is heterocyclo moiety optionally substituted with an oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur containing moiety.
  • H DA contains a diamide and X is a isobutyl group (-CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 ) linked to H DA unit through a nitrogen atom, forming a terminal isobutylamide.
  • X of formula (I) is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl.
  • X of formula (I) is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl comprising 1 to 14 carbon atoms. In further embodiments, X of formula (I) is alkyl or substituted alkyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms. In further embodiments, X of formula (I) is isobutyl.
  • Y of formula (I) is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted alkane, alkene or alkyne.
  • Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted C 2-I2 alkane, alkene or alkyne.
  • Y is unsubstituted or substituted propylene or propenylene.
  • Y of formula (I) is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic aromatic carbocycle.
  • the aromatic carbocycle is an unsubstituted or substituted benzene.
  • Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from unsubstituted benzene.
  • Y of formula (I) is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic heterocycle.
  • the heterocycle is an unsubstituted or substituted pyridine.
  • Y is pyridylene.
  • Y of formula (I) is arylene or heteroarylene and each H DA is bonded to a ring atom of Y.
  • Y of formula (I) is monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic arylene.
  • Y of formula (I) is arylene or heteroarylene having only one 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring; and each H DA is bonded to a ring atom of Y.
  • Y of formula (I) is phenylene, pyridylene, substituted phenylene or substituted pyridylene.
  • Y is arylene or heteroarylene; each H DA is bonded to a ring atom of Y; and each X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • H DA rnay be selected from a variety of organic units containing both hydrogen bond donors and hydrogen bond acceptors.
  • H DA may be substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • H DA will be substituted hydrocarbyl, having lower alkyl ether, ester, thioester, amide, hydroxyl, thiol, amino, azo, or halo substituents or other hydrogen bond donors and hydrogen bond acceptors.
  • H DA contains two amide bonds, such as carboxamide bonds.
  • H DA is a peptide.
  • the self-assembling efficiency of the compounds to form an ion channel may be enhanced when Y links the same or different X-H DA units together, allowing higher possibility for the formation of three-dimensional Iy intermolecular hydrogen bonding network.
  • the unit, Y is in certain embodiments rigid enough to hold the X-H DA units at certain directions in which the compounds may self-assemble more effectively.
  • Y units satisfying these design considerations may be selected from a variety of organic units. In general, these units are carbocyclic or heterocyclic. Non-cyclic Y units are also contemplated.
  • Y may be a 5- or 6-membered ring comprising carbon and optionally a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur ring atom wherein the X-H DA units are covalently linked to ring atoms.
  • Y is a phenylene ring.
  • H DA is a peptide and therefore it can be linked with X and Y units through amide bonds, respectively, by using standard peptide coupling methods.
  • H DA of formula (I) is represented by formula (III):
  • k is 1 or 2;
  • A is O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C 1-1O alkylene where R 2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; B 1 is O or NH; and
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Ci -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • H DA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IIIA):
  • k is 1 or 2;
  • B 1 is O or NH
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Ci -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • H D A of formula (I) is represented by formula (MB): wherein k is 1 or 2;
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Ci -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • H DA of formula (I) is represented by formula (HIC):
  • k is 1 or 2;
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Ci -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • H DA of formula (I) is represented by formula (HID):
  • k is 1 or 2;
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Ci -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • H DA of formula (I) is represented by formula (HIE):
  • k is 1 or 2;
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Ci -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • HD A of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV): O
  • H DA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
  • A is O, S, NR 2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C 1-1O alkylene where R 2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
  • D is Ci -3 alkylene or Cj -3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
  • D of formula (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE) or (IV) is Ci -3 alkylene substituted with at least an alkyl, aryl, substituted alkyl or substituted aryl group.
  • k of formula (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE), (IV) or (IVB) is 1.
  • D of formula (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE) or (IV) is Ci -3 alkylene substituted with at least an isobutyl group.
  • a of formula (III) is a bond; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1. In further embodiments, A of formula (III) is O; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1.
  • D of formula (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE) or (IV) is one of the following formulae:
  • the self-assembling compound has one of the following formulae:
  • each of R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl.
  • the self-assembling compound is one of the following compounds:
  • Example 1 1, o o o Example 2, Example 3, Example 4, Example 5, Example 8, Example 9, 10,
  • Example 15 Example 16, Example 19, Example 23, 24, 25, V " Example 26, and or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
  • Synthetic ion channels can be prepared by constructing pore-like structures across the cell membranes. Synthetic ion channels can be classified based on their structures or "designs.” Referring to FIG. 1, the simplest design of synthetic ion channels comprises a macromolecule of about 25-40 A in length having a "unimolecular" pore-like structure. Other design strategies for preparing supramolecular assembly ion channels include the self-assembly of linear, stave-like monomers into a "barrel-stave” pore-like structure; and the stacking of macrocyclic, hoop-like monomers into a "barrel-hoop" pore-like structure.
  • Some smaller macromolecules may self-assemble into a complex barrel-rosette' pore-like structure which can be conceivable either as the "barrel -stave” pore-like structure with fragmented staves or "barrel-hoop” pore-like structure with fragmented hoops.
  • all of the synthetic ion channels are designed as pore-like structures through which ions transport across the membranes.
  • Provided herein is a new strategy for the design of self-assembling compounds, the molecules of which can self-assemble into ion channels.
  • the designed molecules can self-assemble through non-covalent interactions to form molecular columns in the transverse direction of lipid membranes.
  • intermolecular hydrogen bonds in the lateral direction of the lipid membranes as shown in FIG. 2.
  • these intermolecular hydrogen bonds can be reorganized.
  • the donors or acceptors of the original intermolecular hydrogen bonds will afford successive binding sites for stabilization of the anion or the cation, respectively, when they transport across hydrophobic regions of lipid membranes as shown in FIG. 3.
  • the designed self-assembling compound shows its self-assembled structure in the solid state as shown in FIG. 4b-d having channels that can be used as chloride ion channels.
  • the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein have ability to partition into a lipid bilayer and therein self-assemble into an ion channel. These compounds are thought to assemble through well-defined intermolecularly hydrogen-bonding interactions, which are favored in the low-dielectric-constant medium of lipid bilayers. Such a hydrogen bonding induced assembly of compounds with a relatively lipophilic surface, which allows for stable integration and self-assembly in the non-polar environment of lipid bilayers, may penetrate the hydrophobic region of lipid bilayer membranes to form an ion channel.
  • Physiologically active anions such as chloride ions
  • chloride ion channels neutral anion binding proteins
  • the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein may partition into lipid bilayers of biological and synthetic cell membranes and function as synthetic ion channels.
  • the compound disclosed in Example 2 can be used to prepare such a synthetic chloride channel.
  • Example 2 can insert into lipid bilayers of liposomes and self-assemble to form a 54 pS (pico-Siemens) chloride channel which shows chloride selectivity and voltage dependent gating.
  • the compound of Example 2 can also efficiently form chloride channels in the membranes of human embiyonic kidney (HEK 293) cells and thereby dramatically increases cell chloride currents at a remarkably low concentration of 50 nM (nano-molar).
  • the ion channel behavior of the compound of Example 2 demonstrates that the synthetic ion channel structures disclosed herein can afford selective membrane permeability equivalent in many respects to that observed in natural protein channels.
  • the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein may modulate the concentration of a target anion to allow study on the behavior of physiological systems or models thereof.
  • anion concentration may be varied or regulated by application of the self-assembling compounds in therapeutic systems, to increase or decrease anion concentrations in order to counteract or otherwise modify diseased or unwanted conditions.
  • the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein may be used to modulate the influx or efflux of anions, including, but not limited to halides such as chloride and bromide, or other anions such as nitrate and bicarbonate, into a mammalian cell or other membrane systems, such as, mitochondria, endosomes, lysosomes, secretory vesicles, endoplasmic reticula, nucleii, Golgi apparatus, intracellular transport vesicles, MHC processing vesicles, reconstituted ruffled membrane vesicles from osteoclasts, and others having a lipid bilayer membrane.
  • anions including, but not limited to halides such as chloride and bromide, or other anions such as nitrate and bicarbonate
  • a mammalian cell or other membrane systems such as, mitochondria, endosomes, lysosomes, secretory vesicles, endoplasmic reticula, nucleii, Go
  • the composition of a cell membrane varies depending upon its location in a biological system and its desired function in synthetic systems. Therefore, provided is the formation of synthetic ion channels in a membrane irrespective of whether the membrane is of natural or synthetic origin.
  • the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein have the ability to self-assemble through hydrogen bonds in physiological and non-physiological systems and form anion channels in lipid bilayers or cell membranes.
  • a method of treating, preventing, managing or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or condition associated with abnormal membrane potential responses using the self-assembling compounds and compositions provided herein includes hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features, generalised epilepsy with febrile seizures (GEFS+), generalised epilepsy with febrile and afebrile seizures, paramyotonia congenita, potassium-aggravated myotonia hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis and Brugada syndrome.
  • the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein are inserted into the lipid bilayer of a mammalian cell in an appropriate amount, and manner, as determined by characteristics of the particular compound, patient profile, and disease in question.
  • the compounds and compositions may be applied in vivo, to tissues such as the lungs, trachea, skin, muscle, brain, liver, heart, spleen, bone marrow, thymus, bladder, lymph, blood, pancreas, stomach, kidney, ovaries, testicles, rectum, peripheral or central nervous system, eyes, lymphoid organs, cartilage and endothelium.
  • the target cell is a muscle cell (such as a skeleton muscle cell, a cardiac muscle cell and a smooth muscle cell), a nerve cell, a hematopoietic stem cell, a neuron cell, an epithelium cell or alternatively a cell of the airways.
  • the target cell is a tracheal or pulmonary cell.
  • the target cell is a cell of the respiratory epithelium.
  • the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein can be used as a medicament for curative or preventive purpose.
  • the self-assembling compounds may be used in a method of therapeutic treatment that consists of introducing the compound into the lipid bilayer of target cells which are engaged in ion transport.
  • the compounds may be used in the preparation of a medicament for curative or preventive purposes, intended for the treatment of the human or animal body.
  • the medicament may be administered directly in vivo, for example, into a muscle by infusion, into the lungs by aerosol and the like. It is also possible to adopt an ex vivo approach, which consists of collecting cells from the patient (bone marrow stem cells, peripheral blood lymphocytes, muscle cells, nerve cells, neuron cells, epithelial cells and the like), administering the compounds and re-administering the cells to the patient.
  • cells from the patient bone marrow stem cells, peripheral blood lymphocytes, muscle cells, nerve cells, neuron cells, epithelial cells and the like
  • the self-assembling compounds provided herein may be administered by the intramuscular, intratracheal, intranasal, intracerebral, intrapleural, intratumoral, intracardiac, intragastric, intraperitoneal, epidermal, intravenous or intraarterial route by a syringe or by any other equivalent means, systems suitable for the treatment of the airways or of the mucous membranes such as inhalation, instillation or aerosolization.
  • Other routes of administration include application of a cream, oral administration or any other means known to the person skilled in the art and applicable to the compounds and compositions provided herein.
  • Administration may be achieved by a variety of different routes.
  • a composition such as a pill, capsule or suspension.
  • Such composition may be prepared according to any method known in the art, and may comprise any of a variety of inactive ingredients.
  • Suitable excipients for use within such compositions include insert diluents (which may be solid materials, aqueous solutions and/or oils) such as calcium, potassium, or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium, potassium, or sodium phosphate, water, arachis oil, peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil; granulating and disintegrating agents such as maize starch, gelatin or acacia and/or lubricating agents suchas magnesium stearate, stearic acid, or talc.
  • suspending agents e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth, and gum acacia
  • thickeners e.g., beeswax, paraffin or cetyl alcohol
  • dispersing or wetting agents e.g., preservatives such as ascorbic acid
  • preservatives e.g., antioxidants such as ascorbic acid
  • coloring agents e.g., sweetening agents and/or flavoring agents.
  • sweetening agents e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth, and gum acacia
  • thickeners e.g., beeswax, paraffin or cetyl alcohol
  • dispersing or wetting agents e.g., preservatives such as ascorbic acid
  • Such carriers include controlled release formulations, such as, but not limited to, microencapsulated delivery systems, and biodegradable, biocompatible polymers, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid, polyethylene glycols, polyethylene glycol ethers, and others known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • controlled release formulations such as, but not limited to, microencapsulated delivery systems, and biodegradable, biocompatible polymers, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid, polyethylene glycols, polyethylene glycol ethers, and others known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • compositions are directly administered as a pressurized aerosol or nebulized formulation to the patient's lungs via inhalation.
  • Such formulations may contain any of a variety of known aerosol propellants useful for endopulmonary and/or intranasal inhalation administration.
  • water may be present, with or without any of co-solvents, surfactants, stabilizers (e.g., antioxidants, chelating agents, insert gases and buffers).
  • antimicrobial agents are typically added.
  • Such compositions may also be filtered and sterilized, and may be lyophilized to provide enhanced stability and to improve solubility.
  • compositions can be administered in an amount, and with a frequency, that is effective to inhibit or alleviate the symptoms of a disease or condition, such as cystic fibrosis, and/or delay the progression of the disease.
  • a disease or condition such as cystic fibrosis
  • the precise dosage and duration of treatment may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by testing the composition in model systems known in the art and extrapolating therefrom. Dosages may also vary with the severity of the disease.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may be formulated and administered to exert a therapeutically useful effect while minimizing undesirable side effects. It will be apparent that, for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens may be adjusted over time according to the individual need.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may be administered to a mammal to stimulate chloride transport, or to treat, manage or prevent cystic fibrosis, Bartter's syndrome, Dent's disease, inherited kidney stone disease, myotonia congenita, Becker syndrome, epilepsy, vitelliform macular dystrophy, hyperekplexia, juvenile myoclonus epilepsy or osteopetrose.
  • Patients that may benefit from administration of a self-assembling compound provided herein are those afflicted with cystic fibrosis, Bartter's syndrome, Dent's disease, inherited kidney stone disease, myotonia congenita, Becker syndrome, epilepsy, vitelliform macular dystrophy, hyperekplexia, juvenile myoclonus epilepsy or osteopetrose.
  • Such patients may be identified based on standard criteria that are well known in the art, including the presence of abnormally high salt concentrations in the sweat test, the presence of high nasal potentials, or the presence of a cystic fibrosis-associated mutation.
  • Activation of chloride transport may also be beneficial in other diseases that show abnormally high mucus accumulation in the airways, such as asthma and chronic bronchitis.
  • intestinal constipation may benefit from activation of chloride transport as provided herein.
  • compositions by intravenous, oral, instillation, inhalation, topical, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, or intramuscular routes.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may be administered, for example, in the form of capsules, powders, tablets, liquids, solutions, and aerosolized solutions.
  • methods of treating diseases or other conditions in a mammal that give rise to defective anion transport across cell membranes are also provided.
  • compositions provided will vary, depending on factors such as half-life of the compound, potential adverse effects of the compound or of degradation products thereof, the route of administration, the condition of the patient, and the like. Such factors are capable of determination by those skilled in the art.
  • dose level given on a daily basis is meant to be adapted by a physician to provide the optimum therapeutic response.
  • Example 1 was prepared according to Scheme A above.
  • the starting material, D-ferr-butyl 2-phthalimidoxy-4-methylpentanoate (Compound 1) was synthesized according to the procedures described in Yang etal, J. Org. Chem, 2001, 66, 7303-7312.
  • Compound 1 a white crystalline solid, was characterized by the following data: m.p.
  • Example 1 was characterized by the following data: m.p.
  • Example 2 was prepared according to Scheme B above. To the solution of Example 1 (537 mg, 1.0 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL) was carefully added an equal volume of CF 3 COOH (5 mL) through a syringe at room temperature. After being stirred at room temperature for 3 hour, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was azeotroped with toluene twice to give free acid Compound 3 as a white solid and the white solid was used directly in the peptide coupling.
  • Example 2 Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried free acid Compound 3 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (354 mg, 2.6 mmol), isobutylamine (0.21 mL, 2.1 mmol), and finally EDCI (891 mg, 3.0 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 . The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO 3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford 492 mg of Example 2 (92% yield) as a white solid.
  • Example 2 was characterized by the following data: m.p.
  • Example 3 was prepared according to Scheme C above which was similar to
  • Example 3 was isolated as a colorless oil.
  • Example 4 was prepared according to Scheme D above which was similar to Scheme B for Example 2 except that isobutylamine was replaced with tetradecylamine.
  • Example 4 was isolated as a yellow oil.
  • Example 5 was prepared according to Scheme E above which was similar to Scheme B for Example 2 except that isobutylamine was replaced with octadecylamine.
  • Example 5 was isolated as a white solid.
  • Example 5 was characterized by the following data: m.p.
  • Example 6 was prepared according to Scheme F above. To a solution of Compound 1 (1.00 g, 3.0 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was carefully added equal volume of CF 3 COOH (10 mL) through a syringe at room temperature. After stirred at room temperature for 3 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was azeotroped with toluene twice to give Compound 4 as a white solid and the white solid was used directly in the next step below.
  • Example 6 was characterized by the following data: m.p.
  • Example 7 was prepared according to Scheme G above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH 3 OH (10 mL) was added NH 2 NH 2 -H 2 O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 and was washed with 5% NaHCO 3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
  • Example 8 was prepared according to Scheme H above. N-Boc-L-leucine (Compound 7) (693 mg 3.0 mmol) was dissolved in freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (50 mL) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (530 mg, 3.9 mmol), isobutylamine (0.32 mL, 3.15 mmol), and finally EDCI (1.34 g, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 . The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO 3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated to afford Compound 8 (851 mg, 99%) as a white solid, which was used directly in the next step without further purification.
  • HOAt 530 mg, 3.9 mmol
  • isobutylamine (0.32 mL, 3.15 mmol
  • EDCI EDCI
  • Example 9 was prepared according to Scheme I above. Concentrated sulphuric acid (0.48 mL) was added cautiously to water (22 mL) in a 100 mL round-bottom flask containing L-leucine (Compound 10) (787 mg, 6.0 mmol). A solution of NaNO 2 (1.24 g, 18 mmol ) in water (40 mL) was added through a dropping funnel at such a rate that the temperature of the reaction mixture does not exceed 5 0 C. After stirred at 0 0 C for 1 hour, the reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred for another 1 hour.
  • Compound 10 L-leucine
  • Example 2 was also prepared according to Scheme J above which was similar to Scheme G for Example 7 except that pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid was replaced with isophthalic acid.
  • Example 2 was isolated as a white solid which was characterized by the following data: m.p.
  • Example 10 was prepared according to Scheme K above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH 3 OH (10 mL) was added NH 2 NH 2 -H 2 O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 and was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO 3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
  • Example 11 was prepared according to Scheme L above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH 3 OH (10 mL) was added NH 2 NH 2 -H 2 O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 and was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO 3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
  • Examples 12 and 13 were prepared according to Scheme M above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH 3 OH (10 niL) was added NH 2 NH 2 -H 2 O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 and was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO 3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
  • Example 12 (40 mg, 0.08 mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL MeOH, and 4 mg 10% Pd/C was added to the mixture. Then the mixture was stirred with H 2 at rt under balloon pressure overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and concentrated to afford Example 13 (40 mg, quant).
  • Example 14 was prepared according to Scheme N above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH 3 OH (10 mL) was added NH 2 NH 2 -H 2 O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 and was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO 3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
  • Example 14 was characterized by the following data: [ ⁇ ] 20 D + 31.4° (c 1.00, CHCl 3 ); 1 HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) ⁇ 9.78 (s, 2H), 7.98 (br, 2H), 4.30-4.26 (m, 2H), 3.21-3.14 (m, 2H), 3.02-2.93 (m, 2H), 2.12-2.11 (m, 4H), 1.73-1.60 (m, 12H), 0.99-0.91 (m, 24H); 13 C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl 3 ) ⁇ 172.11, 171.89, 85.35, 46.55, 41.02, 32.37, 28.36, 24.71, 23.16, 21.71, 20.07; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 515 (M + +l, 10), 131 (100); HRMS (EI) for C 26 H 50 N 4 O 6 (M + ): calculated 514.373, found 514.3768.
  • Example 15 was prepared according to Scheme O above. To a solution of Compound 1 (2.00 g, 6.0 mmol) in CH 3 OH (20 mL) was added NH 2 NH 2 -H 2 O (900 mg, 18.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After being stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 and washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO 3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of the free amine (Compound 2) and phthahydroazide as colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the peptide coupling reaction below without further purification.
  • Examplel ⁇ was prepared according to Scheme P above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (30 niL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 13 (860 mg, 3.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (6 mL, 75 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 13 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 16 was prepared according to Scheme Q above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (30 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 13 (860 mg, 3.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (6 mL, 75 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 13 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 16 was prepared according to Scheme R above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (30 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 13 (860 mg, 3.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (6 mL, 75 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 13 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 19 was prepared according to Scheme S above.
  • Compound 14 was synthesized according to the procedures described in Miller et ah, J. Org. Chem, 1986, 51, 5332-5337.
  • L-Leucine (2.88 g, 22 mmol) was dissolved in aqueous 60% perchloric acid (4 g, 24 mmol) with stirring in an ice bath.
  • tert-Butyl acetate 75 mL was added and the stirring was continued until a homogeneous solution was obtained.
  • the mixture was kept at room temperature for 2 days, then 0.1N HCl (100 mL) was added to the mixture.
  • the aqueous phase was separated from the ether phase, and the aqueous phase was adjusted with aqueous Na 2 CO 3 to pH about 9.
  • the aqueous phase was extracted 3 times with EtOAc and the organic layer was combined, washed with brine, dried over with anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated to afford Compound 14 (3.05 g, 74% yield) as a colorless oil, which was used directly in the next step.
  • Example 20 was prepared according to Scheme T above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 15 (270 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 15 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 21 was prepared according to Scheme U above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 15 (270 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 15 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 22 was prepared according to Scheme V above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 15 (270 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 15 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 23 was prepared according to Scheme W above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing Boc-Leu-OH (1.25 g, 5 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (0.88 g, 6.5 mmol), isobutylamine (1 mL, 10 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (1.50 g, 7.5 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • Example 24 was prepared according to Scheme X above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 25 was prepared according to Scheme Y above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stii ⁇ ed at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 26 was prepared according to Scheme Z above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 27 was prepared according to Scheme AA above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 28 was prepared according to Scheme AB above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 rnL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 29 was prepared according to Scheme AC above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 30 was prepared according to Scheme AD above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
  • Example 31 was prepared according to Scheme AE above. Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing L-(+)-Mandelic acid (1.52 g, 10 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (1.633 g, 12 mmol), isobutylamine (1.2 mL, 12 mmol), and finally EDC ⁇ C1 (2.60 g, 13 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 . The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO 3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated to afford Compound 16 as an oil ( 1.94 g , 94%).
  • Example 31 Freshly distilled CH 2 Cl 2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 18 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (752 mg, 5.13 mmol), isophthalic acid (353 mg, 2.13 mmol), triethylamine (0.6 mL, 4.3 mmol), and Finally EDC-HCl (1.27 g, 6.38 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 . The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO 3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 31 (734 mg, 60% yield) as a white solid. Example 31 was characterized by the following data: [ ⁇ ] 20 D -58.2° (c 1.00, DMSO); 1 H NMR (400 MHz,
  • Example 32 was prepared according to Scheme AF above.
  • Compound 19 was synthesized according to the procedures described in Satoshi mura et ah, Org. Lett, 2005, 7, 941-943.
  • Compound 19 (2.0 g, 9.1 mmol), N-hydroxy phthalimide(1.64 g, 10.1 mmol) and PPh 3 (2.9 g, 11 mmol) were dissolved in dry THF (100 niL) in a 250 mL dry round bottom flask. Then DIAD (diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, 2 mL, 10.1 mmol) was added dropwisely using a syringe in an ice bath.
  • DIAD diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, 2 mL, 10.1 mmol
  • Example 33 was prepared according to Scheme AG above.
  • Compound 22 was synthesized according to the procedures described in Yang et ah, J. Org. Chem, 2001, 66,
  • Example 34 and 35 were prepared according to Scheme AH above Compound
  • Example 34 (270 mg, 0.35 mmol) was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (2 mL) In an ice bath, TFA (1 mL) was added dropwisely. 4 hours later, the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the Example 35.
  • Example 36 was prepared according to Scheme AI.
  • L-Ser(tBu)-OH (1.61 g, 10 mmol) was dissolved in aqueous KHSO 4 solution (2.04 g in 40 mL water).
  • the solution was cooled to 0 0 C, followed by addition of aqueous NaNO 2 solution (1.04 g in 20 mL water) dropwisely during 30 minutes. Then stirring was continued overnight at room temperature.
  • the solution was extracted with ethyl acetate 3 times and the combined organic phase was dried and concentrated to afford compound 28 (1.21 g, 75% yield) as a yellow oil, which can be used directly in the next step without further purification.
  • N-hydroxyphthlalimide (0.98 g, 6.0 mmol) were dissolved in 50 mL dry THF. The solution was cooled to 0 0 C, followed by addition of DEAD (1.31 g, 7.5 mmol) dropwisely in 5 minutes. Then the solution was stirring at room temperature for additional 2 hours. After concentration, the residue was purified by silica gel using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 30 (1.23 g, 68% yield) as colorless oil.
  • Example 37 was prepared according to Scheme AJ.
  • Compound 33 (735mg, 2 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL MeOH, then hydrazine hydrate (80% in water, 0.5 mL, 6 mmol) was added into the solution in one portion. After 2 hours (TLC showed complete conversion), MeOH and excessive hydrazine were removed in vacuum. The residue was suspended in ether/hexane (2:1, v/v). The white solid (phthalhydrazide, a byproduct of hydrozinolysis) was filtered off and washed with ether/hexane (2:1, v/v). The filtrate was collected and concentrated to afford compound 34 (426 mg, 90% yield) which can be used in the next step without further purification .
  • Example 38 & 39 were prepared according to Scheme AK.
  • Compound 37 [prepared according to J. Org. Chem. 2000, 65, 7667] (335 mg, 1.0 mmol) was added in 30 mL CH 2 Cl 2 , followed by addition of HOAt (150 mg, 1.1 mmol) and EDC-HCl (240 mg, 1.2 mmol) successively with stirring. After 2 minutes, isobutylamine (105 ⁇ L, 1.05 mmol) was added dropwisely. The solution was stirring for 5 hours, then diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (30 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO 4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO 3 (2 times), and dried with Na 2 SO 4 .
  • Example 42 were prepared according to Scheme AM.
  • Example 2 illustrates that the compound of Example 2 mediates chloride release when incorporated into liposomes.
  • the liposome-based pH-stat fluorometric assay is an assay routinely used for identification of physiologically relevant ionophores, which are disclosed in (a) Deng, G.., Dewa, T. and Regen, S. L. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1996, 118, 8975; (b) Schlesinger, P. H., Ferdani, R., Liu, J., Pajewska, J., Pajewski, R., Saito, M., Shabany, H. and Gokel, G. W. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2002, 124, 1848; (c) Sidorov, V., Kotch, F. W.,
  • a controlled amount of the base and potential ionophore is added to a suspension of liposomes containing a pH-sensitive dye, 8-hydroxypyrene-l,3,6- trisulfonate (HPTS, pyranine).
  • HPTS 8-hydroxypyrene-l,3,6- trisulfonate
  • the resulting pH gradient across the bilayer membrane causes the efflux of hydronium ions or the influx of hydroxide ions and builds up an electrostatic potential.
  • This potential can be compensated by the efflux of anions or influx of cations (H + /M + or OHV A " antiport and H 4 VA " or M + /0H " symport mechanisms are possible). If the compound of interest mediates such ion transport, the efflux of hydronium ions or the influx of hydroxide ions continues altering the intravascular pH and the fluorescence of the reporter dye.
  • Example 2-mediated chloride release was determined in large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs) of 100 nm average dimension, as reported in Sidorov, V., Kotch, F. W., Abdrakhmanova, G, Mizani, R., Fettinger, J. C. and Davis, J. T. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2002, 124, 2267.
  • FIG. 5 shows that the application of Example 2 resulted in rapid, concentration-dependent exchange between extra- and intravesicular electrolytes.
  • Example 2 mediated electrolyte exchange with high anion selectivity. It mediated electrolyte exchange in the presence of chloride but not in the presence of sulfate (see FIG. 6).
  • Example 2 mediates chloride transport across the bilayer.
  • FIG. 7 shows that in addition to Example 2, Examples 1 and 3-42 can also mediate chloride transport across lipid bilayers of chloride-containing liposomes with different efficiencies.
  • Example 44 shows that the compound of Example 2 can function as a voltage-dependent chloride-selective channel when partitioned into lipid bilayers.
  • Single-channel recording using patch clamp techniques, is the most critical test for identifying ion channel formation, which is distinguished from other ion transport mechanisms such as ion carriers, and quantifying ion transport efficiency of a membrane channel.
  • the channel-forming activity of Example 2 incorporated in lipid bilayers is examined using patch-clamp technique on giant liposomes. Characteristic single-channel currents were recorded with primary conductance of 54 pS in symmetric 0.2 M iV-methyl-glucamine hydrochloride (NMDG-Cl) solutions when application of Example 2 in bath solution (FIG. 8), indicating that Example 2 can partition into lipid bilayers of liposomes efficiently and thereby forms ionic channels.
  • NMDG-Cl symmetric 0.2 M iV-methyl-glucamine hydrochloride
  • ion selectivity that is, a channel permits only certain ionic species to flow through its pore
  • gating referring to the mechanism of channel opening and closing.
  • the ion channels formed by Example 2 turned out to be anion selective and voltage-gated. There was no measurable change either in conductance or in reversal potential when NMDG-Cl in the bath solution was replaced by potassium chloride (KCl) 5 suggesting that these channels are not permeable to K ions.
  • KCl potassium chloride
  • the channel open probability (P 0 ) and frequency were enhanced steeply upon increasing voltages of lipid bilayers within a physiologically relevant range of voltages, suggesting voltage-dependent gating (FIG. 8).
  • Example 45 shows that the compound of Example 2 partitions into human cell membranes and dramatically increases cell chloride currents.
  • the whole-cell configuration of the patch-clamp technique was used to examine the electrophysiological properties of the ionic currents induced by Example 2 in human embryonic kidney (HEK 293) cells.
  • HEK 293 cell line originally obtained from the American Type Culture Collection, were cultured in DMEM supplemented with 10% FBS and 100 IU/ml penicillin G and 0.1 mg/ml streptomycin. Cells were grown at 37 0 C in a 5% CO 2 humidified incubator.
  • Example 2 caused a large increase in whole cell currents (FIG. 9), indicating that Example 2 may mediate Cl ions transport efficiently across cell membranes of HEK 293 cells.
  • the induced currents were not reduced in the presence of a cellular anion transport inhibitor such as 4,4'-diisothiocyanatostilbene-2,2'-disulfonate (DIDS).
  • DIDS 4,4'-diisothiocyanatostilbene-2,2'-disulfonate
  • Example 46 shows the chloride transport activity of the compound of Example 2 in liposome with chloride-sensitive fluorescent indicator SPQ.
  • the large multilamellar liposome suspension (ImL) was submitted to high-pressure extrusion at room temperature (> 21 extrusions through a 0.1 ⁇ m polycarbonate membrane afforded a suspension of large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs) with an average diameter of 100 nm).
  • the LUV suspension was separated from extravesicular dye by size exclusion chromatography (SEC) (stationary phase: Sephadex G-50, mobile phase: solution B: 20 mM NaNO3) and diluted with the solution B to give a stock solution with a lipid concentration of 10 mM (assuming 100% of lipid was incorporated into liposomes).
  • SEC size exclusion chromatography
  • Fluorescent Assay Typically, 100 ⁇ L of SPQ-loaded vesicles (stock solution) was suspended in 1.9 mL of solution C (200 mM NaCl) and placed into a fluorimetric cell. SPQ emission at 430 nm was monitored with excitation wavelengths at 360 nm. At 100 seconds, 20 ⁇ L of a 0.5 mM THF solution of Example 2 was added through an injection port. The results are shown in FIG. 10.
  • Example 47 shows the X-ray crystallographic analysis of example 2.
  • the X-ray crystal structure of Example 2 is shown in FIG. 11.
  • the other X-ray crystallographic data and data collection method are shown below.
  • Example 2 The physiological behaviors and functions of the synthetic chloride channel formed by Example 2 in terms of its contributions to cell membrane potentials was investigated according to the following procedure. To avoid the interferences from natural ion channels, liposomes and artificial lipid bilayer vesicles were used as a model system to assess the capacity of Example 2 to vary membrane potential.
  • FIG. 12A the egg yolk phosphatidylcholine (EYPC) liposomes containing sodium sulfate (Na 2 SO 4 ) were suspended in an isotonic sodium chloride (NaCl) extravesicular solution with a membrane potential sensitive dye, i.e., safranin O.
  • a membrane potential sensitive dye i.e., safranin O.
  • FIG. 12B addition of Example 2 to the liposome suspensions induced a rapid increase in fluorescence intensity of safranin O, indicating the formation of stable negative charge inside liposomes. This may be due to the fact that Example 2 can only mediate chloride rather than sulfate or sodium ions transporting across lipid bilayers.
  • Example 2 mediated chloride ions flowing into the liposomes, the interiors of the liposomes become progressively more negative relative to the exteriors.
  • Fig. 12C-12J shows that in addition to Example 2, Examples 10-42 can also modulate membrane potentials of liposomes with different efficiencies.
  • Example 2 The ability of Example 2 to modulate membrane potentials in polarized liposomes was investigated.
  • the EYPC-liposomes encapsulating potassium chloride (KCl) were suspended in an isotonic mixture of KCl and Na 2 SO 4 solution to produce a transmembrane K + concentration gradient.
  • External addition of the selective K + carrier valinomycin resulted in K + efflux, which polarized the liposome by establishing an inside negative membrane potential.
  • the assay was completed by the application of Example 2 and the membrane potential was monitored by changes of the fluorescence intensity of extravesicular safranin O. As shown in Fig.
  • Example 2 rapidly depolarized the EYPC-liposomes. This depolarization process induced by Example 2 may be attributed to the formation of chloride channels by Example 2 that mediate chloride ions flow out of the polarized liposomes to balance the electrostatic potential established by valinomycin.
  • Example 2 was investigated for incorporating into the plasma membranes of living cells and, thereby, modulating their membrane potentials by increasing chloride permeability of the cell membranes.
  • a potential-sensitive dye t ⁇ -oxonal was used to measure the relative changes in membrane potential of the Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells, a model for the renal distal tubule and collecting duct that secrete chloride ions.
  • MDCK Madin-Darby canine kidney
  • An increase in fluorescence of ⁇ zs-oxonal indicated cell depolarization while a decrease indicated hyperpolarization.
  • Example 2 depolarized the cells by restoring chloride permeability of the cell membranes (Fig. 14D and 14E).
  • FIG. 14A-E show the effects of adding different substances, including Example 2, on the membrane potential of Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells.
  • MDCK Madin-Darby canine kidney
  • FIG. 14A shows that the addition of 10 ⁇ M foskolin resulted in significant depolarization of the membrane potential of MDCK cells.
  • FIG. 14B shows the addition of 10 ⁇ M of Example 2 resulted in depolarization of the membrane potential of MDCK cells.
  • FIG. 14C shows that the perfusing the MDCK cells with relatively low chloride (100 mM chloride) solution, assisted by addition of 10 ⁇ M of Example 2, resulted in slight depolarization of the membrane potential of MDCK cells.
  • FIG. 14D shows that the addition of 1 mM DPC resulted in hyperpolarization of the membrane potential, and the subsequent addition of 10 ⁇ M of Example 2 resulted in a shift of the hyperpolarized membrane potential toward the original resting potential.
  • FIG. 14E shows that perfusing the MDCK cells with low Cl " (60 mM Cl " ) Ringer's solution in the presence of 1 mM DPC did not result in depolarization of the membrane potential of MDCK cells, but subsequent addition of 10 ⁇ M Example 2 resulted in depolarization of such membrane potential.
  • Example 2 could increase the chloride permeability and thus shift the membrane potential back (i.e. repolarize the membrane potential) toward Ea that is likely lower than the activation potential of L-type Ca 2+ channels in these cells. Furthermore, the prior application of Example 2 showed no obvious effect on both the membrane potential and the [Ca 2+ ], of A7r5 cells, implying that the Ea was close to the resting membrane potential of the cells.
  • Example 2 may serve as the first synthetic ion channel that regulates[Ca 2+ ], by modulating membrane potential in living cells.
  • FIG. 16A-B show that the prior treatment of Example 2 on A7r5 cells resulted in no obvious depolarization effect nor change in the [Ca 2+ ].
  • the subsequent addition of high-K + solution resulted in a much weaker depolarization effect compared with those treated without the presence of Example 2, as shown in FIG. 15 A-B.
  • Example 52 was for investigating whether Example 2 could promote vasorelaxation during vasoconstriction induced by depolarization.
  • Mouse thoracic aortic rings was mounted in an organ bath apparatus and measured their muscular activity.
  • Fig. 17A shows a typical experiment in which increasing the concentrations of Example 2 from 1 to 30 uM induced the complete relaxation of mouse aortic rings preconstricted by high-K solution.
  • Example 52 was for investigating whether Example 2 could induce muscle contraction by activating ⁇ -adrenergic receptor.
  • Example 2 was tested to relax the mouse aortic rings constricted by the ⁇ -adrenergic receptor agonist phenylephrine (PE).
  • Example 2 may lead to relaxation of preconstricted mouse aortic rings by repolarizing membrane potential to deactivate voltage-gated Ca 2+ channels in smooth muscle cells, paralleling with the proposed functional role played by cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator (CFTR) chloride channels in smooth muscle cells in controlling the vascular tone.
  • CFTR cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator
  • embodiments herein provide various self-assembling compounds which are useful for making ion-channel compositions and membranes comprising same. While this disclosure has been described with respect to a limited number of embodiments, the specific features of one embodiment should not be attributed to other embodiments of the invention. No single embodiment is representative of all aspects of the invention. In some embodiments, the compositions or methods may include numerous compounds or steps not mentioned herein. In other embodiments, the compositions or methods do not include, or are substantially free of, any compounds or steps not enumerated herein. Variations and modifications from the described embodiments exist. For example, the ion-channel compositions disclosed herein need not comprising only self-assembling compounds. It can comprise any type of compounds generally suitable for ion-channel compositions.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Provided herein are methods of modulating membrane potential of a cell membrane using self-assembling compounds. Also provided herein are methods of regulating a natural voltage-dependent ion channel in a cell membrane using the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein. Further provided herein are methods of treating, preventing and /or managing a disease that is related to the abnormal membrane potential responses by using the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein.

Description

METHOD OF MODULATING MEMBRANE POTENTIAL OF A CELL
FIELD
[0001] Provided herein are methods of modulating membrane potential of a cell membrane using self-assembling compounds. Also provided herein are methods of regulating a natural voltage-dependent ion channel in a cell membrane using the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein. Further provided herein are methods of treating, preventing and/or managing a disease that is related to the abnormal membrane potential responses by using the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein.
BACKGROUND
[0002] Membrane potential, i.e., the electrical potential difference across the membrane of a living cell, is an intrinsic character of the live cell. Many important physiological processes, such as neuronal signaling, muscle contraction, cardiovasculaer function and immune response, involve a change in membrane potential. Generally, membrane potentials in cells depend on, inter alia, three factors: 1) the concentration of ions on the inside and outside of the cell; 2) the permeability of the cell membrane to those ions through specific ion channels; and 3) by the activity of electrogenic pumps that maintain the ion concentrations across the membrane. Therefore, ion channels that can selectively mediate the transfer of ions across the membrane of a cell may play a crucial role in establishing and controlling the membrane potential of the cell.
[0003] While ion channels may control the membrane potential of a cell, the membrane potential, however in a reverse way, can regulate the functions of many ion channels, especially voltage-dependent ion channels. For example, a change in membrane potential caused by the opening of a certain ion channel may affect behaviors of other ion channels and induce an action cascade of them, e.g., the contraction of muscle cells. In fact, abnormal membrane potential responses have been implicated in many severe human diseases such as hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features, generalised epilepsy with febrile seizures (GEFS+), generalised epilepsy with febrile and afebrile seizures, paramyotonia congenita, potassium-aggravated myotonia hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis or Brugada syndrome.
[0004] While most studies have focused on natural ion channels, it is desirable to create synthetic ion channel systems that mimic biological functions of natural ion channels for controlling membrane potential and/or regulating natural voltage-dependent ion channels. To date, however, there is still no synthetic ion channel reported to be capable to set the membrane potentials and/or regulate natural voltage-dependent ion channels in living systems. Therefore, there is a need for new synthetic ion channels that can modulate membrane potential and/or regulate natural voltage-dependent ion channels and their physiological functions in living cells and tissues. Further, there is a need for methods of treating or preventing conditions and diseases that is related to the abnormal membrane potential responses.
SUMMARY
[0005] Provided herein are methods of using self-assemble compounds to modulate membrane potential of a cell membrane; to regulate a natural voltage-dependent ion channel in a cell membrane; or to treat, manage or prevent a disease that is related to the abnormal membrane potential responses.
In one aspect, provided herein are methods of modulating membrane potential of a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; and (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell. In some embodiments, the methods further comprise a step of imposing an anion gradient across the cell membrane.
[0006] In another aspect, provided herein are methods of regulating a natural voltage-dependent ion channel in a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; and (c) regulating the natural voltage-dependent ion channel, wherein the self-assembling compound has formula (I) as defined herein. In some embodiments, the methods further comprise a step of imposing an anion gradient across the cell membrane. In other embodiments, the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent sodium channel, potassium channel or calcium channel. In further embodiments, the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent calcium channel.
[0007] In another aspect, provided herein are methods of regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of a cell comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; and (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell.
[0008] In another aspect, provided herein are methods of regulating the tension of a muscle cell comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell; and (e) regulating the tension of the muscle cell.
[0009] In another aspect, provided herein are methods of regulating a vascular tone comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the membrane of a vascular smooth muscle cell; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell; (e) regulating the tension of the vascular smooth muscle cell; and (f) regulating the vascular tone.
[0010] In some embodiments, the cell is a muscle cell. In other embodiments, the cell is a smooth muscle cell. In further embodiments, the cell is a vascular smooth muscle cell. In still further embodiments, the natural voltage-dependent calcium channel is L-type calcium channel.
[0011] In some embodiments, the anion is fluoride, chloride, bromide, iodide, nitrate, nitrite, sulfate, bisulfate, carbonate, bicarbonate, phosphate, hydrogen phosphate, dihydrogen phosphate or acetate. In other embodiments, the anion is chloride. In further embodiments, the anion channel is a chloride channel. In still further embodiments, the anion gradient is a chloride gradient. In still further embodiments, the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
[0012] In another aspect, provided herein are methods of treating, managing or preventing a human disease that is related to the abnormal membrane potential responses, the method comprising administering a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I) as defined below, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
[0013] In some embodiments, the disease is hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features, generalised epilepsy with febrile seizures (GEFS+), generalised epilepsy with febrile and afebrile seizures, paramyotonia congenita, potassium-aggravated myotonia hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis or Brugada syndrome. In other embodiments, the disease is hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, or Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features. In further embodiments, the self-assembling compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or stereoisomer thereof is inserted into the lipid bilayer of a cell of the mammal. In still further embodiments, the mammal is a human.
[0014] In another aspect, provided herein are methods of treating, managing or preventing a human disease that is related to the abnormal membrane potential responses, the method comprising administering a pharmaceutical composition comprising the self-assembling compound having formula (I) as defined below, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
[0015] In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition further comprises a carrier. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition further comprises at least an ingredient selected from the group consisting of excipients, carriers, diluents, and combinations thereof. In other embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition is in a single unit dosage form. In further embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition is in a single unit dosage form suitable for inserting into the lipid bilayer of a mammalian cell.
[0016] In some embodiments, the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a the self-assembling compounds having formula (I):
(X-HDΛ-^ Y (I) wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6;
Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon (e.g., alkane, alkene and alkyne), carbocycle (e.g., aliphatic carbocycle such as cyclohexane, or arene such as benzene) or heterocycle (e.g., heteroarene such as pyridine); and
HDA is a divalent group having the formula (II), (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE), (IV) or (IVB):
Figure imgf000006_0001
wherein each of Z1 and Z2 is independently O, S or NR1; each of A, B2, and D is independently O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-io alkylene; each of B'and B3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R and R is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of Bl and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
[0017] In other embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (III):
Figure imgf000007_0001
wherein k is an integer from 1 to 20;
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl;
B1 is O or NH; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[0018] In certain embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV):
Figure imgf000007_0002
wherein D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[0019] In certain embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
Figure imgf000007_0003
wherein A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl. [0020] In some embodiments, n of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is 1. In other embodiments, n is 2 or 3, and at least two of the X-HDA units are the same. In further embodiments, n is 2 or 3, and at least two of the X-HDA units are different.
[0021] In some embodiments, X of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl. In other embodiments, X is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl comprising 1 to 14 carbon atoms. In further embodiments, X is alkyl or substituted alkyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms. In still further embodiments, X is isobutyl.
[0022] In some embodiments, Y of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted alkane, alkene or alkyne. In other embodiments, Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted C2-I2 alkane, alkene or alkyne. In further embodiments, Y is unsubstituted or substituted propylene or propenylene.
[0023] In certain embodiments, Y of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic aromatic carbocycle. In other embodiments, Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted arene such as benzene.
[0024] In some embodiments, Y of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic heterocycle. In other embodiments, Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted heteroarene such as pyridine.
[0025] In certain embodiments, HDA of formula (I) of the self-assembling compound disclosed herein comprises at least one primary amide or secondary amide group. [0026] In some embodiments, D of formula (II), (III), (IV) or (IVB) is Ci-3 alkylene substituted with at least an alkyl, aryl, substituted alkyl or substituted aryl group. In other embodiments, D is Ci-3 alkylene substituted with at least an isobutyl group. In still further embodiments, D is methylene substituted with an isobutyl.
[0027] In certain embodiments, A of formula (II) or (III) is a bond; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1. In further embodiments, A of formula (II) or (III) is O; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1. In still further embodiments, Y is arylene, heteroarylene, alkylene or alkenylene; and each X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
[0028] In some embodiments, the self-assembling compound disclosed herein is one of Examples 1-42, or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
[0029] In further embodiments, the self-assembling compound is
Figure imgf000009_0001
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
[0030] FIG. 1 depicts some classifications of synthetic ion channels based on their structures or "designs."
[0031] FIG. 2 depicts a synthetic ion channel across a lipid bilayer where the dashed lines represent hydrogen bonds and the thick solid lines represent self-assembling molecules, each of which comprises at least a hydrogen bond donor (represented by D) and at least a hydrogen bond acceptor (represented by A).
[0032] FIG. 3 depicts a possible anion transport process in the synthetic ion channel of FIG. 2 where the sphere represents an anion, the dashed lines represent hydrogen bonds and the thick solid lines represent self-assembling molecules, each of which comprises at least a hydrogen bond donor (represented by D) and at least a hydrogen bond acceptor (represented by A). The anion forms a hydrogen bond individually and sequentially with each of the hydrogen bond donors along the synthetic ion channel when it passes through the channel.
[0033] FIG. 4a-d depict various chemical representations Example 2. FIG. 4a depicts the chemical structure of Example 2. FIG. 4b depicts the crystal structure of Example 2 in stick representation where carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen and oxygen atoms are represented by grey, white, blue and red sticks respectively. Two eight-membered-ring intramolecular hydrogen bonds having a bond length of 2.13 A are shown as green dashed lines. FIG. 4c and 4d depicts the top view and side view respectively of the solid-state packing of Example 2. The CH hydrogen atoms in FIG. 4c and 4d are omitted for clarity. Intermolecular hydrogen bonds, shown as green solid lines in FIG. 4d, link and align adjacent molecules together to form a pore-structure.
[0034] FIG. 5 shows chloride release mediated by Example 2 at different concentrations from large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs), where NaCl extra- and intravesicular buffers were used. The experimental details are described in Example 43.
[0035] FIG. 6 shows Example 2 mediated electrolyte exchange in the presence of chloride but not in the presence of sulfate. The experimental details are described in Example 43.
[0036] FIG. 7 shows chloride transport ability of different synthetic ion channels derived from Examples 1-42 in LUVs, where NaCl extra- and intravesicular buffers were used.
[0037] FIG. 8 shows single-channel recording results illustrating that Example 2 can mediate chloride transport across lipid bilayer by an ion channel mechanism featuring voltage-dependent gating property. The experimental details are described in Example 44.
[0038] FIG. 9 shows whole-cell recording results illustrating that Example 2 can increase cell chloride currents when partitioned into human cell membranes. The experimental details are described in Example 45.
[0039] FIG. 10 shows the chloride transport activity of Example 2 in liposome with chloride-sensitive fluorescent indicator SPQ. [0040] FIG. 11 shows the X-ray crystal structure of Example 2.
[0041] FIG. 12A depicts the change of membrane potential of a liposome after Example 2 was added to the liposome. FIG. 12B shows the change of fluorescence intensity at different times (min) after Example 2 was added to the liposome. FIG. 12C-12J shows the change of fluorescence intensity at different times (min) after Examples 10-42 were added to the liposome.
[0042] FIG. 13A depicts the change of membrane potential of a liposome after (1) valinomycin and (2) Example 2 were added to the liposome. FIG. 13B shows the change of fluorescence intensity at different times (min) after the valinomycin and Example 2 were added to the liposome.
[0043] FIG. 14A-E depict the changes of fluorenscence intensity of the membrane potential of Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells at different times (min) after (A) 10 μM of foskolin; (B) 10 μM of Example 2; (C) 100 mL of CI" and 10 μM of Example 2; (D) 1 mM of diphenylamine-2-carboxylate (DPC) and 10 μM of Example 2; (E) 60 mM of Cl", 1 mM of DPC, and 10 μM of Example 2, were added to the MDCK cells, respectively.
[0044] FIG. 15A depicts the changes of the membrane potential of the A7r5 cells at different times (min) after the A7r5 cells are sequentially treatment with 60 mM K+ solution and 10 μM of Example 2. FIG. 16B depicts the changes Of [Ca2+] of the A7r5 cells at different times (min) after the A7r5 cells are sequentially treatment with 60 mM K+ solution, 1 μ of Example 2, and 10 μM of Example 2.
[0045] FIG. 16A-B depict the changes of the membrane potential and [Ca2+] respectively of the A7r5 cells at different times (min) after the A7r5 cells are sequentially treatment with 10 μM of Example 2 and 60 mM K+ solution.
[0046] FIG. 17A-B shows the vasorelaxant effects of increasing the concentrations of Example 2 on mouse aorta preconstricted by (A) the 60 mM K+ solution; and (B) the 10 μm of α-adrenergic agonist phenylephrine (PE)5 respectively. FIG. 17C depicts the relationships between the concentrations of Example 2 and the vasorelaxant effects on mouse aorta preconstricted by the 60 mM K+ solution (•) and the 10 μM of PE (A), respectively.
DEFINITIONS
[0047] To facilitate the understanding of the subject matter disclosed herein, a number of terms, abbreviations or other shorthand as used herein are defined below. Any term, abbreviation or shorthand not defined is understood to have the ordinary meaning used by a skilled artisan contemporaneous with the submission of this application.
[0048] "pS" means picoSiemens.
[0049] "mM" means millimolar.
[0050] "uM" means M = micromolar.
[0051] "iiM" means nanomolar.
[0052] "Anion" means a negatively-charged ion.
[0053] "Cation" means a positively-charged ion.
[0054] "Bilayer membrane" or "lipid bilayer" refers to a bimolecular thick assembly that forms the permeability barrier surrounding eukaryotic cells and plays a similar role in intracellular compartments, liposomes, and other organelles. This membrane is comprised of any of a large number of amphipathic lipid molecules but in cells it is primarily comprised of phospholipids.
[0055] "Cell" refers to prokaryotic cell, yeast cell, eukaryotic cell, plant cell, human cell, animal cell, and in one embodiment, a mammalian cell.
[0056] "Membrane" refers to a thin, semi-permeable barrier that separates two liquid phases which may have the same or different compositions.
[0057] "Cell membrane" refers to a selectively permeable lipid bilayer coated by proteins. The cell membrane comprises the outer layer of a cell. [0058] "Channel" or "ion channel" refers to an aqueous diffusion pathway for membrane impermeant compounds usually formed by a pore within a cell membrane permitting the transfer of neutral or ionic species through it from one side of the membrane to the other.
[0059] "Supramolecular assembly" refers to a well defined complex of molecules held together by noncovalent bonds such as van de Waals force or hydrogen bonds. A supramolecular assembly can comprise two or more molecules. The supramolecular assembly can be in any form or shape such as sphere, cylinder, disk, or sheet which can be solid or hallow. In some embodiments, the supramolecular assembly is in the form of hallow cylinder. In other embodiments, the supramolecular assembly is in the form of a channel with a pore. The dimensions of supramolecular assemblies can range from nanometers to micrometers.
[0060] "Self-assembly" refers to the assembly of molecules without guidance or management from an outside source. There are generally two types of self-assembly, intramolecular self-assembly and intermolecular self-assembly. Intramolecular self-assembling molecules are generally complex polymers having the ability to assemble from the random coil conformation into a well-defined stable structure. Intermolecular self-assembly is the ability of molecules to form supramolecular assemblies.
[0061] "Self-assembling compound" or "self-assembling molecule" refers to the compound or molecule that can form a supramolecular assembly through a intermolecular self-assembly process.
[0062] "Hydrogen bond donor" refers to a group having at least one hydrogen atom attached to a strongly electronegative heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur.
[0063] "Hydrogen bond acceptor" refers to a strongly electronegative heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine, and bromine.
[0064] "Liposome" refers to an artificial sac, usually spherical, consisting of one (unilamellar) or more (multilamellar) bilayer membranes of phospholipid that encloses an aqueous core and in significant ways mimics biological membranes. The term liposome is sometimes used interchangeably with "vesicle." [0065] "Unilamellar" refers to the bilayer membrane of phospholipid liposomes consists of a single layer.
[0066] "Multilamellar" refers to the bilayer membrane of phospholipid liposomes consists of more than one concentric layer, structurally analogous to an onion.
[0067] "Selectivity" refers to a measurable preference for one species over another, including cation over anion, anion over cation, one cation over a different cation, or one anion over a different anion.
[0068] "Transport" refers to the movement of an ion or other species across a membrane boundary.
[0069] "Amino" refers to a primary, secondary, or tertiary amine which may optionally be hydrocarbyl, substituted hydrocarbyl or heteroatom substituted. Specifically included are secondary or tertiary amine nitrogen atoms which are members of a heterocyclic ring. Also specifically included, for example, are secondary or tertiary amino groups substituted by an acyl moiety.
[0070] "Alkyl" refers to a fully saturated acyclic monovalent radical containing carbon and hydrogen, and which may be branched or a straight chain. Examples of alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, n-heptyl, and isopropyl. Unless otherwise indicated, the alkyl groups described herein are preferably lower alkyl containing from one to ten carbon atoms in the principal chain and up to 20 carbon atoms, as exemplified by methyl, ethyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, t-butyl, isoamyl, n-pentyl, and isopentyl.
[0071] "Alkenyl" refers to a monovalent or divalent unsaturated, preferably monounsaturated, radical containing carbon and hydrogen, and which may be cyclic, branched or a straight chain. Unless otherwise indicated, the alkenyl groups described herein are preferably lower alkyl containing from two to eight carbon atoms in the principal chain and up to 20 carbon atoms, as exemplified by ethenyl, propenyl, isopropenyl, butenyl, isobutenyl, hexenyl, and the like. [0072] "Alkynyl" refers to a lower alkyl containing from two to eight carbon atoms in the principal chain and up to 20 carbon atoms. They may contain straight or branched chain, as exemplified by ethynyl, propynyl, isopropynyl, butynyl, isobutynyl, hexynyl, and the like.
[0073] "Aromatic" refers to aryl or heteroaryl.
[0074] "Aryl" refers to optionally substituted carbocyclic aromatic groups, preferably monocyclic or bicyclic groups containing from 6 to 12 carbon atoms in the ring portion, such as phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, substituted phenyl, substituted biphenyl or substituted naphthyl. Phenyl and substituted phenyl are the more preferred aryl.
[0075] "Halogen" or "halo" refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
[0076] "Heteroatom" shall mean atoms other than carbon and hydrogen.
[0077] "Heterocyclo" or "heterocyclyl" refers to optionally substituted, fully saturated or unsaturated, monocyclic or bicyclic, aromatic or nonaromatic groups having at least one heteroatom in at least one ring, and preferably 5 or 6 atoms in each ring. The aromatic heterocyclyl (i.e., heteroaryl) group preferably has 1 or 2 oxygen atoms, 1 or 2 sulfur atoms, and/or 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms in the ring, and may be bonded to the remainder of the molecule through a carbon or heteroatom. Non-limiting examples of heteroaryl include furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, oxazolyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl and the like. Non-limiting examples of substituents include one or more of the following groups: hydrocarbyl, substituted hydrocarbyl, keto, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, acyl, acyloxy, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, halogen, amido, amino, nitro, cyano, thiol, ketals, acetals, esters and ethers.
[0078] "Hydrocarbon" or "hydrocarbyl" refers to organic compounds or radicals consisting exclusively of the elements carbon and hydrogen. Hydrocarbyl includes alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and aryl moieties. Hydrocarbyl also includes alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and aryl moieties substituted with other aliphatic, cyclic or aryl hydrocarbon groups, such as alkaryl, alkenaryl and alkynaryl. In some embodiments, "hydrocarbon" or "hydrocarbyl" comprises 1 to 20 carbon atoms. [0079] "Hydrocarbylene" is a divalent group formed by removing two hydrogen atoms from a hydrocarbon, the free valencies of which are not engaged in a double bond, e.g. 1,3-phenylene, propane- 1,3-diyl, and methylene.
[0080] "Substituted" as used herein to describe a compound or chemical moiety means that at least one hydrogen atom of that compound or chemical moiety is replaced with a second chemical moiety. The second chemical moiety can be any desired substituent that does not adversely affect the desired activity of the compound. Examples of substituents are those found in the exemplary compounds and embodiments disclosed herein, as well as halogen; alkyl; heteroalkyl; alkenyl; alkynyl; aryl, heteroaryl, hydroxyl; alkoxyl; amino; nitro; thiol; thioether; imine; cyano; isocyanate, thioisocyanate, amido; phosphonato; phosphine; carboxyl; thiocarbonyl; sulfonyl; sulfonamide; ketone; aldehyde; ester; oxo; haloalkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl); carbocyclic cycloalkyl, which can be monocyclic or fused or non-fused polycyclic (e.g., cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl) or a heterocycloalkyl, which can be monocyclic or fused or non-fused polycyclic (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl or thiazinyl); carbocyclic or heterocyclic, monocyclic or fused or non-fused polycyclic aryl (e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, furanyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, acridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothiophenyl or benzofuranyl); amino (primary, secondary or tertiary); o-lower alkyl; o-aryl, aryl; aryl-lower alkyl; -CO2CH3; -CONH2; -OCH2CONH2; -NH2; -SO2NH2; -OCHF2; -CF3; -OCF3; -NH(alkyl); -N(alkyl)2; -NH(aryl); -N(alkyl)(aryl); -N(aryl)2; -CHO; -CO(alkyl); -CO(aryl); -CO2(alkyl); and -CO2(aryl); and such moieties can also be optionally substituted by a fused-ring structure or bridge, for example -OCH2O-. These substituents can optionally be further substituted with a substituent selected from such groups. All chemical groups disclosed herein can be substituted, unless it is specified otherwise. For example, "substituted" alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, hydrocarbyl or heterocyclo moieties described herein are moieties which are substituted with a hydrocarbyl moiety, a substituted hydrocarbyl moiety, a heteroatom, or a heterocyclo. Further, substituents may include moieties in which a carbon atom is substituted with a heteroatom such as nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, phosphorus, boron, sulfur, or a halogen atom. These substituents may include halogen, heterocyclo, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, hydroxy, protected hydroxy, keto, acyl, acyloxy, nitro, amino, amido, cyano, thiol, ketals, acetals, esters and ethers.
[0081] "Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" includes, but is not limited to, salts of acidic or basic groups that may be present in the compounds of the invention. Compounds of the invention that are basic in nature are capable of forming a wide variety of salts with various inorganic and organic acids. The acids that may be used to prepare pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such basic compounds are those that form salts comprising pharmacologically acceptable anions including, but not limited to, acetate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bitartrate, bromide, calcium edetate, camsylate, carbonate, chloride, bromide, iodide, citrate, dihydrochloride, edetate, edisylate, estolate, esylate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydroxynaphthoate, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, mesylate, methylsulfate, muscate, napsylate, nitrate, panthothenate, phosphate/diphosphate, polygalacturonate, salicylate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tannate, tartrate, teoclate, triethiodide, and pamoate. Compounds of the invention that include an amino group also can form pharmaceutically acceptable salts with various amino acids, in addition to the acids mentioned above. Compounds of the invention that are acidic in nature are capable of forming base salts with various pharmacologically acceptable cations. Non-limiting examples of such salts include alkali metal or alkaline earth metal salts and, particularly, calcium, magnesium, sodium, lithium, zinc, potassium, and iron salts.
[0082] "Stereoisomer" encompasses all enantiomerically/stereomerically pure and enantiomerically/stereomerically enriched compounds disclosed herein.
[0083] "Stereomerically pure" or "enantiomerically pure" means that a compound comprises one stereoisomer and is substantially free of its counter stereoisomer or enantiomer. For example, a compound is stereomerically or enantiomerically pure when the compound contains 80%, 90% or 95% or more of one stereoisomer and 20%, 10% or 5% or less of the counter stereoisomer. In some cases, a compound of the invention is considered optically active or stereomerically/enantiomerically pure (i.e., substantially the R-form or substantially the S-form) with respect to a chiral center when the compound is about 80% ee (enantiomeric excess) or greater, preferably, equal to or greater than 90% ee with respect to a particular chiral center and more preferably 95% ee with respect to a particular chiral center.
[0084] "Stereomerically enriched" or "enantiomerically enriched" encompasses racemic mixtures as well as other mixtures of stereoisomers of compounds of this invention (e.g., R/S = 30/70, 35/65, 40/60, 45/55, 55/45, 60/40, 65/35 and 70/30).
[0085] "Hydrate" means a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometeric amount of water bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces.
[0086] "Solvate" means a solvate formed from the association of one or more solvent molecules to a compound of the present invention. The term "solvate" includes hydrates (e.g., mono-hydrate, dihydrate, trihydrate, tetrahydrate, and the like).
[0087] "Polymorph" means solid crystalline forms of a compound of the present invention or complex thereof. Different polymorphs of the same compound can exhibit different physical, chemical and /or spectroscopic properties.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0088] Provided herein are methods of modulating membrane potential of a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; and (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell. In some embodiments, the methods further comprise a step of imposing an anion gradient across the cell membrane.
[0089] Also provided herein are methods of regulating a natural voltage-dependent ion channel in a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; and (c) regulating the natural voltage-dependent ion channel, wherein the self-assembling compound has formula (I) as defined herein. In some embodiments, the methods further comprise a step of imposing an anion gradient across the cell membrane. In other embodiments, the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent sodium channel, potassium channel or calcium channel. In further embodiments, the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent calcium channel.
[0090] Also provided herein are methods of regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of a cell comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; and (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell.
[0091] Also provided herein are methods of regulating the tension of a muscle cell comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell; and (e) regulating the tension of the muscle cell.
[0092] Also provided herein are methods of regulating a vascular tone comprising the steps of (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the membrane of a vascular smooth muscle cell; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; (c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell; (e) regulating the tension of the vascular smooth muscle cell; and (f) regulating the vascular tone.
[0093] In some embodiments, the cell used in the method disclosed herein is a muscle cell. In other embodiments, the cell is a smooth muscle cell. In further embodiments, the cell is a vascular smooth muscle cell. In still further embodiments, the natural voltage-dependent calcium channel is L-type calcium channel. In still further embodiments, the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
[0094] In some embodiments, the anion used in the method disclosed herein is fluoride, chloride, bromide, iodide, nitrate, nitrite, sulfate, bisulfate, carbonate, bicarbonate, phosphate, hydrogen phosphate, dihydrogen phosphate or acetate. In other embodiments, the anion is chloride. In further embodiments, the anion channel is a chloride channel. In still further embodiments, the anion gradient is a chloride gradient.
[0095] Any self-assembling compound that can form a synthetic anion channel can be used for the methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments, the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I):
( X-HDA-^ Y (I) wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6;
Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon, carbocycle or heterocycle; and HDA is a divalent group having formula (II):
Figure imgf000020_0001
wherein each of Z1 and Z2 is independently O, S or NR1; each of A, B1, B2, B3 and D is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R1 and R2 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of Bl and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
[0096] In some embodiments, each of A, B2, and D is independently O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-I0 alkylene; and each of B'and B3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted CMO alkylene.
[0097] In certain embodiments, HDA is a substituted hydrocarbylene comprising at least one hydrogen bond donor and at least one hydrogen bond acceptor. In further embodiments, the hydrogen bond donor comprises a hydrogen atom bonded directly to oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur. In further embodiments, the hydrogen bond acceptor is an oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine, or bromine atom. In certain embodiments, HDA of formula (I) comprises at least one primary amide or secondary amide group.
[0098] In certain embodiments, n of formula (I) is 1. In other embodiments, n of formula (I) is 2, and the two X-HDA units are either the same or different.
[0099] In some embodiments, X is a hydrocarbyl group such as alkyl, aryl, or aralkyl containing up to 18 carbon atoms, optionally substituted with an oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur containing moiety. In other embodiments, X is heterocyclo moiety optionally substituted with an oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur containing moiety. In one embodiment, HDA contains a diamide and X is a isobutyl group (-CH2CH(CH3)2) linked to HDA unit through a nitrogen atom, forming a terminal isobutylamide. In other embodiments, X of formula (I) is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl. In certain embodiments, X of formula (I) is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl comprising 1 to 14 carbon atoms. In further embodiments, X of formula (I) is alkyl or substituted alkyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms. In further embodiments, X of formula (I) is isobutyl.
[00100] In certain embodiments, Y of formula (I) is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted alkane, alkene or alkyne. In further embodiments, Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted C2-I2 alkane, alkene or alkyne. In still further embodiments, Y is unsubstituted or substituted propylene or propenylene.
[00101] In some embodiments, Y of formula (I) is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic aromatic carbocycle. In further embodiments, the aromatic carbocycle is an unsubstituted or substituted benzene. In further embodiments, Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from unsubstituted benzene.
[00102] In some embodiments, Y of formula (I) is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic heterocycle. In further embodiments, the heterocycle is an unsubstituted or substituted pyridine. In further embodiments, Y is pyridylene.
[00103] In certain embodiments, Y of formula (I) is arylene or heteroarylene and each HDA is bonded to a ring atom of Y. In some embodiments, Y of formula (I) is monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic arylene. In other embodiments, Y of formula (I) is arylene or heteroarylene having only one 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring; and each HDA is bonded to a ring atom of Y. In certain embodiments, Y of formula (I) is phenylene, pyridylene, substituted phenylene or substituted pyridylene.
[00104] In further embodiments, Y is arylene or heteroarylene; each HDA is bonded to a ring atom of Y; and each X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
[00105] In certain embodiments, HDA rnay be selected from a variety of organic units containing both hydrogen bond donors and hydrogen bond acceptors. For example, HDA may be substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl. Without being bound by any theory, it appears that the driving force for self-assembly of compounds to form an ion channel is contributed primarily by a large number of well-defined intermolecularly hydrogen-bonding interactions, which are favoured in the low-dielectric-constant medium of lipid bilayers. In certain embodiments, HDA will be substituted hydrocarbyl, having lower alkyl ether, ester, thioester, amide, hydroxyl, thiol, amino, azo, or halo substituents or other hydrogen bond donors and hydrogen bond acceptors. In one embodiment, for example, HDA contains two amide bonds, such as carboxamide bonds. In another embodiment, HDA is a peptide.
[00106] In other embodiments, the self-assembling efficiency of the compounds to form an ion channel may be enhanced when Y links the same or different X-HDA units together, allowing higher possibility for the formation of three-dimensional Iy intermolecular hydrogen bonding network. In these embodiments, the unit, Y, is in certain embodiments rigid enough to hold the X-HDA units at certain directions in which the compounds may self-assemble more effectively. Y units satisfying these design considerations may be selected from a variety of organic units. In general, these units are carbocyclic or heterocyclic. Non-cyclic Y units are also contemplated. For example, Y may be a 5- or 6-membered ring comprising carbon and optionally a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur ring atom wherein the X-HDA units are covalently linked to ring atoms. In one embodiment, Y is a phenylene ring.
[00107] The compounds provided herein may be made by one skilled in organic synthesis by known techniques as well as by the general synthetic procedures disclosed herein. The design, synthesis, and characterization of the compounds are described in detail in Examples. In one embodiment, for example, HDA is a peptide and therefore it can be linked with X and Y units through amide bonds, respectively, by using standard peptide coupling methods.
[00108] In other embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (III):
Figure imgf000023_0001
wherein k is 1 or 2;
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-1O alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; B1 is O or NH; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[00109] In other embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IIIA):
Figure imgf000023_0002
wherein k is 1 or 2;
B1 is O or NH; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[00110] In other embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (MB): wherein k is 1 or 2;
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[00111] In other embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (HIC):
Figure imgf000024_0002
wherein k is 1 or 2;
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[00112] In other embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (HID):
Figure imgf000024_0003
wherein k is 1 or 2;
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[00113] In other embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (HIE):
Figure imgf000024_0004
wherein k is 1 or 2;
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[00114] In certain embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV): O
A°Ύ (IV) wherein D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[00115] In other embodiments, HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
Figure imgf000025_0001
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-1O alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Cj-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
[00116] In certain embodiments, D of formula (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE) or (IV) is Ci-3 alkylene substituted with at least an alkyl, aryl, substituted alkyl or substituted aryl group. In certain embodiments, k of formula (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE), (IV) or (IVB) is 1. In further embodiments, D of formula (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE) or (IV) is Ci-3 alkylene substituted with at least an isobutyl group. In further embodiments, A of formula (III) is a bond; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1. In further embodiments, A of formula (III) is O; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1.
[00117] In other embodiments, D of formula (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE) or (IV) is one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000026_0001
[00118] In some embodiments, the self-assembling compound has one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000026_0002
wherein each of R3 , R4 , R5 and R6 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl.
[00119] In certain embodiments, the self-assembling compound is one of the following compounds:
1, o o o Example 2,
Figure imgf000026_0003
Example 3,
Figure imgf000026_0004
Example 4,
Figure imgf000026_0005
Example 5,
Figure imgf000026_0006
Figure imgf000026_0007
Example 8,
Figure imgf000027_0002
Example 9,
Figure imgf000027_0001
10,
Figure imgf000027_0003
Example 15, Example 16,
Figure imgf000027_0004
Figure imgf000027_0005
Example 19,
Figure imgf000027_0006
Figure imgf000027_0007
Figure imgf000027_0009
Example 23,
Figure imgf000027_0008
24,
Figure imgf000027_0010
25, V" Example 26,
Figure imgf000027_0011
Figure imgf000028_0001
and
Figure imgf000028_0002
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
[00120] Synthetic ion channels can be prepared by constructing pore-like structures across the cell membranes. Synthetic ion channels can be classified based on their structures or "designs." Referring to FIG. 1, the simplest design of synthetic ion channels comprises a macromolecule of about 25-40 A in length having a "unimolecular" pore-like structure. Other design strategies for preparing supramolecular assembly ion channels include the self-assembly of linear, stave-like monomers into a "barrel-stave" pore-like structure; and the stacking of macrocyclic, hoop-like monomers into a "barrel-hoop" pore-like structure. Some smaller macromolecules may self-assemble into a complex barrel-rosette' pore-like structure which can be conceivable either as the "barrel -stave" pore-like structure with fragmented staves or "barrel-hoop" pore-like structure with fragmented hoops. [00121] Up to now, all of the synthetic ion channels are designed as pore-like structures through which ions transport across the membranes. Provided herein is a new strategy for the design of self-assembling compounds, the molecules of which can self-assemble into ion channels. In some embodiments, the designed molecules can self-assemble through non-covalent interactions to form molecular columns in the transverse direction of lipid membranes. In one embodiment, between two parallel molecular columns, there are intermolecular hydrogen bonds in the lateral direction of the lipid membranes as shown in FIG. 2. When an anion or cation reaches membranes, these intermolecular hydrogen bonds can be reorganized. The donors or acceptors of the original intermolecular hydrogen bonds will afford successive binding sites for stabilization of the anion or the cation, respectively, when they transport across hydrophobic regions of lipid membranes as shown in FIG. 3. In one embodiment, the designed self-assembling compound shows its self-assembled structure in the solid state as shown in FIG. 4b-d having channels that can be used as chloride ion channels.
[00122] Without being bound by any theory, although the detailed mechanism is not yet known clearly, the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein have ability to partition into a lipid bilayer and therein self-assemble into an ion channel. These compounds are thought to assemble through well-defined intermolecularly hydrogen-bonding interactions, which are favored in the low-dielectric-constant medium of lipid bilayers. Such a hydrogen bonding induced assembly of compounds with a relatively lipophilic surface, which allows for stable integration and self-assembly in the non-polar environment of lipid bilayers, may penetrate the hydrophobic region of lipid bilayer membranes to form an ion channel. [00123] Physiologically active anions, such as chloride ions, are involved in a number of biological processes. In nature, the transport of chloride ions through cell membranes is regulated by neutral anion binding proteins (chloride ion channels). The self-assembling compounds disclosed herein may partition into lipid bilayers of biological and synthetic cell membranes and function as synthetic ion channels. For example, the compound disclosed in Example 2 can be used to prepare such a synthetic chloride channel. Example 2 can insert into lipid bilayers of liposomes and self-assemble to form a 54 pS (pico-Siemens) chloride channel which shows chloride selectivity and voltage dependent gating. The compound of Example 2 can also efficiently form chloride channels in the membranes of human embiyonic kidney (HEK 293) cells and thereby dramatically increases cell chloride currents at a remarkably low concentration of 50 nM (nano-molar). The ion channel behavior of the compound of Example 2 demonstrates that the synthetic ion channel structures disclosed herein can afford selective membrane permeability equivalent in many respects to that observed in natural protein channels.
[00124] The self-assembling compounds disclosed herein may modulate the concentration of a target anion to allow study on the behavior of physiological systems or models thereof. Alternatively, anion concentration may be varied or regulated by application of the self-assembling compounds in therapeutic systems, to increase or decrease anion concentrations in order to counteract or otherwise modify diseased or unwanted conditions. Accordingly, the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein may be used to modulate the influx or efflux of anions, including, but not limited to halides such as chloride and bromide, or other anions such as nitrate and bicarbonate, into a mammalian cell or other membrane systems, such as, mitochondria, endosomes, lysosomes, secretory vesicles, endoplasmic reticula, nucleii, Golgi apparatus, intracellular transport vesicles, MHC processing vesicles, reconstituted ruffled membrane vesicles from osteoclasts, and others having a lipid bilayer membrane.
[00125] In biological and synthetic systems, the composition of a cell membrane varies depending upon its location in a biological system and its desired function in synthetic systems. Therefore, provided is the formation of synthetic ion channels in a membrane irrespective of whether the membrane is of natural or synthetic origin. In certain embodiments, the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein have the ability to self-assemble through hydrogen bonds in physiological and non-physiological systems and form anion channels in lipid bilayers or cell membranes.
[00126] Also provided is a method of treating, preventing, managing or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or condition associated with abnormal membrane potential responses using the self-assembling compounds and compositions provided herein. Non-limiting examples of such a disease or condition include hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features, generalised epilepsy with febrile seizures (GEFS+), generalised epilepsy with febrile and afebrile seizures, paramyotonia congenita, potassium-aggravated myotonia hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis and Brugada syndrome. In some embodiments, the self-assembling compounds disclosed herein are inserted into the lipid bilayer of a mammalian cell in an appropriate amount, and manner, as determined by characteristics of the particular compound, patient profile, and disease in question.
[00127] In certain embodiments, the compounds and compositions may be applied in vivo, to tissues such as the lungs, trachea, skin, muscle, brain, liver, heart, spleen, bone marrow, thymus, bladder, lymph, blood, pancreas, stomach, kidney, ovaries, testicles, rectum, peripheral or central nervous system, eyes, lymphoid organs, cartilage and endothelium. In certain embodiments, the target cell is a muscle cell (such as a skeleton muscle cell, a cardiac muscle cell and a smooth muscle cell), a nerve cell, a hematopoietic stem cell, a neuron cell, an epithelium cell or alternatively a cell of the airways. In other embodiments, the target cell is a tracheal or pulmonary cell. In further embodiments, the target cell is a cell of the respiratory epithelium.
[00128] The self-assembling compounds disclosed herein can be used as a medicament for curative or preventive purpose. Specifically, the self-assembling compounds may be used in a method of therapeutic treatment that consists of introducing the compound into the lipid bilayer of target cells which are engaged in ion transport. As such, the compounds may be used in the preparation of a medicament for curative or preventive purposes, intended for the treatment of the human or animal body.
[00129] The medicament may be administered directly in vivo, for example, into a muscle by infusion, into the lungs by aerosol and the like. It is also possible to adopt an ex vivo approach, which consists of collecting cells from the patient (bone marrow stem cells, peripheral blood lymphocytes, muscle cells, nerve cells, neuron cells, epithelial cells and the like), administering the compounds and re-administering the cells to the patient.
[00130] The self-assembling compounds provided herein may be administered by the intramuscular, intratracheal, intranasal, intracerebral, intrapleural, intratumoral, intracardiac, intragastric, intraperitoneal, epidermal, intravenous or intraarterial route by a syringe or by any other equivalent means, systems suitable for the treatment of the airways or of the mucous membranes such as inhalation, instillation or aerosolization. Other routes of administration include application of a cream, oral administration or any other means known to the person skilled in the art and applicable to the compounds and compositions provided herein.
[00131] Administration may be achieved by a variety of different routes. One route is oral administration of a composition such as a pill, capsule or suspension. Such composition may be prepared according to any method known in the art, and may comprise any of a variety of inactive ingredients. Suitable excipients for use within such compositions include insert diluents (which may be solid materials, aqueous solutions and/or oils) such as calcium, potassium, or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium, potassium, or sodium phosphate, water, arachis oil, peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil; granulating and disintegrating agents such as maize starch, gelatin or acacia and/or lubricating agents suchas magnesium stearate, stearic acid, or talc. Other inactive ingredients that may, but need not, be present include one or more suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth, and gum acacia), thickeners (e.g., beeswax, paraffin or cetyl alcohol), dispersing or wetting agents, preservatives (e.g., antioxidants such as ascorbic acid), coloring agents, sweetening agents and/or flavoring agents. [00132] A pharmaceutical composition may be prepared with carriers that protect active ingredients against rapid elimination from the body, such as time release formulations or coatings. Such carriers include controlled release formulations, such as, but not limited to, microencapsulated delivery systems, and biodegradable, biocompatible polymers, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid, polyethylene glycols, polyethylene glycol ethers, and others known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
[00133] In other embodiments, provided are methods in which the compounds are directly administered as a pressurized aerosol or nebulized formulation to the patient's lungs via inhalation. Such formulations may contain any of a variety of known aerosol propellants useful for endopulmonary and/or intranasal inhalation administration. In addition, water may be present, with or without any of co-solvents, surfactants, stabilizers (e.g., antioxidants, chelating agents, insert gases and buffers). For compositions to be administered from multiple dose containers, antimicrobial agents are typically added. Such compositions may also be filtered and sterilized, and may be lyophilized to provide enhanced stability and to improve solubility.
[00134] Pharmaceutical compositions can be administered in an amount, and with a frequency, that is effective to inhibit or alleviate the symptoms of a disease or condition, such as cystic fibrosis, and/or delay the progression of the disease. The precise dosage and duration of treatment may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by testing the composition in model systems known in the art and extrapolating therefrom. Dosages may also vary with the severity of the disease. A pharmaceutical composition may be formulated and administered to exert a therapeutically useful effect while minimizing undesirable side effects. It will be apparent that, for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens may be adjusted over time according to the individual need.
[00135] As noted above, a pharmaceutical composition may be administered to a mammal to stimulate chloride transport, or to treat, manage or prevent cystic fibrosis, Bartter's syndrome, Dent's disease, inherited kidney stone disease, myotonia congenita, Becker syndrome, epilepsy, vitelliform macular dystrophy, hyperekplexia, juvenile myoclonus epilepsy or osteopetrose. Patients that may benefit from administration of a self-assembling compound provided herein are those afflicted with cystic fibrosis, Bartter's syndrome, Dent's disease, inherited kidney stone disease, myotonia congenita, Becker syndrome, epilepsy, vitelliform macular dystrophy, hyperekplexia, juvenile myoclonus epilepsy or osteopetrose. Such patients may be identified based on standard criteria that are well known in the art, including the presence of abnormally high salt concentrations in the sweat test, the presence of high nasal potentials, or the presence of a cystic fibrosis-associated mutation. Activation of chloride transport may also be beneficial in other diseases that show abnormally high mucus accumulation in the airways, such as asthma and chronic bronchitis. Similarly, intestinal constipation may benefit from activation of chloride transport as provided herein.
[00136] Also provided are methods of administering the pharmaceutical compositions by intravenous, oral, instillation, inhalation, topical, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, or intramuscular routes. The pharmaceutical compositions may be administered, for example, in the form of capsules, powders, tablets, liquids, solutions, and aerosolized solutions. Also provided are methods of treating diseases or other conditions in a mammal that give rise to defective anion transport across cell membranes.
[00137] Additional features and advantages of the invention will be set forth, and in part will be apparent from the description, or may be learned by practice of the invention.
[00138] Dosages of the compositions provided will vary, depending on factors such as half-life of the compound, potential adverse effects of the compound or of degradation products thereof, the route of administration, the condition of the patient, and the like. Such factors are capable of determination by those skilled in the art. The exact dose level given on a daily basis, of course, is meant to be adapted by a physician to provide the optimum therapeutic response.
EXAMPLES
[00139] The following Examples 1-42 are detailed descriptions of the methods of making and using the compounds represented by general formula (I). Other compounds with the scope of this disclosure may be prepared using the procedures with appropriate starting material which are apparent to those of skill in the art. These examples are presented for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
Preparation of Example 1
Figure imgf000035_0001
Compound 1 Compound 2
Figure imgf000035_0002
Example 1
Scheme A
[00140] Example 1 was prepared according to Scheme A above. The starting material, D-ferr-butyl 2-phthalimidoxy-4-methylpentanoate (Compound 1), was synthesized according to the procedures described in Yang etal, J. Org. Chem, 2001, 66, 7303-7312. Compound 1, a white crystalline solid, was characterized by the following data: m.p. 92-93 ° C; [α]2°o +77.0° (c 1.01, CHCl3); 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.85-7.81 (m, 2H), 7.78-7.74 (m, 2H), 4.74 (dd, J = 8.5, 5.4 Hz, IH), 2.05-1.91 (m, 2H), 1.72-1.63 (m, IH), 1.46 (s, 9H), 1.07 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 3H), 1.00 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 3H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 169.13, 163.21, 134.50, 128.87, 123.53, 84.74, 83.39, 39.89, 27.82, 24.47, 22.90, 21.96; IR (CHCl3) 3032, 1793, 1738 cm"1; LRMS (EI, 70 ev) m/z 333 (M+,l), 278 (6), 232 (17), 164 (15), 148 (100); HRMS (EI) for C18H23NO5 (M+): calculated 333.1576, found 333.1573.
[00141] To a solution of Compound 1 (2.00 g, 6.0 mmol) in CH3OH (20 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (900 mg, 18.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After being stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and washed with 5% NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of the free amine (Compound 2) and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the peptide coupling reaction below without further purification. [00142] Peptide Coupling Reaction. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 2 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of 1 -hydroxy -7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 2.11 g, 15.6 mmol), isophthalic acid (498 mg, 3.0 mmol), triethylamine (0.83 mL, 6.0 mmol), and finally l-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylamino-propyl)-carbodiimide (EDCI, 5.35 g, 18.0 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford 1.32 g (82% yield) of Example 1 as white solid. Example 1 was characterized by the following data: m.p. 57-59 °C; [CC]20 D + 78.1° (c 0.50, CHCl3); 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 9.86 (br, 2H), 8.14 (t, J= 1.5 Hz, IH), 7.90 (dd, J = 7.8, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 7.48 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 4.53 (dd, J = 9.0, 4.2 Hz, 2H), 2.01-1.92 (m, 2H), 1.77-1.68 (m, 2H), 1.60-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.46 (s, 18H), 1.02 (d, J= 6.5 Hz, 12H), 0.96 (d, J= 6.5 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 171.80, 164.58, 132.18, 130.41, 128.91, 125.58, 82.37, 82.17, 39.86, 27.97, 24.60, 23.18, 23.01, 21.79; IR (CHCl3) 3403, 3019, 1730, 1688 cm"1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 536 (M+); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C28H44N2O8 (M+): calculated 536.3098, found 536.3078.
Preparation of Example 2
Figure imgf000036_0001
Example 1 Compound 3
Figure imgf000036_0002
Example 2
Scheme B
[00143] Example 2 was prepared according to Scheme B above. To the solution of Example 1 (537 mg, 1.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) was carefully added an equal volume of CF3COOH (5 mL) through a syringe at room temperature. After being stirred at room temperature for 3 hour, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was azeotroped with toluene twice to give free acid Compound 3 as a white solid and the white solid was used directly in the peptide coupling.
[00144] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried free acid Compound 3 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (354 mg, 2.6 mmol), isobutylamine (0.21 mL, 2.1 mmol), and finally EDCI (891 mg, 3.0 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford 492 mg of Example 2 (92% yield) as a white solid. Example 2 was characterized by the following data: m.p. 176-178 0C; [α]20o +67.3° (c 0.50, CHCl3); 1H NMR (600 MHz, CDCl3) δ 10.43 (s, 2H), 8.12 (s, IH), 8.07 (t, J= 5.7 Hz, 2H), 8.04 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.57 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH) , 4.40 (dd, J = 9.5, 3.4 Hz, 2H), 3.05-3.01 (m, 2H), 2.91-2.88 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.62 (m, 8H), 0.92 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 12H), 0.84 (d, J = 6.7 Hz, 6H), 0.78 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3J δ 171.89, 166.14, 131.97, 131.30, 129.69, 124.93, 85.60, 46.69, 41.15, 28.29, 24.85, 23.18, 21.81, 20.04, 19.99; IR (CHCl3) 3332, 3185, 1663 cm'1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 534 (M+); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C28H46N4O6 (M+): calculated 534.3417, found 534.3435.
Preparation of Example 3
Figure imgf000037_0001
Example 1 Compound 3
Figure imgf000037_0002
Example 3
Scheme C
[00145] Example 3 was prepared according to Scheme C above which was similar to
Scheme B for Example 2 except that isobutylamine was replaced with decylamine. Example 3 was isolated as a colorless oil. Example 3 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D +34.5° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 11.32 (s, 2H), 8.28 (br, 2H), 8.19 (s, IH), 8.05 (d, J= 7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.52 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, IH) , 4.38 (br, 2H), 3.13-3.02 (m, 4H), 1.82 (m, 2H), 1.65-1.55 (m, 4H), 1.42 (br, 4H), 1.35-1.25 (m, 28H), 0.89-0.85 (m, 18H); 13CNMR (IOO MHz, CDCl3) δ 172.30, 165.91,132.05, 131.29, 129.37, 124.98, 85.31, 41.17, 39.47, 31.89, 29.55, 29.53, 29.30, 29.12, 26.91, 24.73, 23.18, 22.67, 21.79, 14.10; IR (CHCl3) 3446, 1662 cm"1; LRMS (FAB) m/z 704 (M+,l); HRMS (FAB) for C40H7]N4O6 (M+,l): calculated 703.5374, found 703.5354.
Preparation of Example 4
Figure imgf000038_0001
Example I Compound 3
Figure imgf000038_0002
Example 4
Scheme D
10 [00146] Example 4 was prepared according to Scheme D above which was similar to Scheme B for Example 2 except that isobutylamine was replaced with tetradecylamine. Example 4 was isolated as a yellow oil. Example 4 was characterized by the following data: [α]20D +52.2° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 10.97 (s, 2H), 8.15 (br, 3H), 8.05 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.53 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH) , 4.36 (dd, J= 9.1, 3.7 Hz, 2H), 3.16-3.06 (m, 4H),
15 1.80 (m, 2H), 1.65-1.55 (m, 4H), 1.43 (br, 4H), 1.25-1.17 (m, 44H), 0.89-0.85 (m, 18H); 13C NMR (IOO MHz, CDCl3) δ 171.96, 165.92, 132.00, 131.26, 129.43, 124.93, 85.38, 41.07, 39.39, 31.89, 29.67, 29.64, 29.59, 29.53, 29.33, 29.27, 29.14, 26.89, 24.72, 23.12, 22.66, 21.77, 14.08; IR (CHCl3) 3441, 3342, 1662 cm"1; LRMS (FAB) m/z 816 (Mt 1); HRMS (FAB) for C48H87N4O6 (M+,l): calculated 815.6626, found 815.6610.
-2^ Preparation of Example 5
Figure imgf000039_0001
Example 5
Scheme E
[00147] Example 5 was prepared according to Scheme E above which was similar to Scheme B for Example 2 except that isobutylamine was replaced with octadecylamine. Example 5 was isolated as a white solid. Example 5 was characterized by the following data: m.p. 88-90 0C; [α]20 D +43.9° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 11.11 (s, 2H)5 8.18 (br, 3H), 8.05 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.55 (t, J= 7.7 Hz, IH), 4.36 (dd, J= 8.8, 3.4 Hz, 2H), 3.15-3.05 (m, 4H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 1.65-1.54 (m, 4H), 1.41 (br, 4H), 1.30-1.16 (m, 60H), 0.89-0.84 (m, 18H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCla) δ 172.03, 165.89, 131.98, 129.37, 124.98, 85.31, 41.06, 39.39, 31.89, 29.69, 29.60, 29.53, 29.33, 29.28, 29.12, 26.88, 24.68, 23.12, 22.56, 21.74, 14.08; IR (CHCl3) 3444, 3345, 1662 cm"'; LRMS (FAB) m/z 928 (M+ 1); HRMS (MALDI) for C56Hi02N4O6 (M++ Na): calculated 927.4323, found 949.7678.
Preparation of Example 6
Figure imgf000039_0002
Compound 1 Compound 4 Compound 5
Figure imgf000039_0003
Scheme F
[00148] Example 6 was prepared according to Scheme F above. To a solution of Compound 1 (1.00 g, 3.0 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was carefully added equal volume of CF3COOH (10 mL) through a syringe at room temperature. After stirred at room temperature for 3 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was azeotroped with toluene twice to give Compound 4 as a white solid and the white solid was used directly in the next step below.
[00149] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 4 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (530 mg, 3.9 mmol), isobutylamine (0.32 mL, 3.15 mmol), and finally EDCI (1.34 g, 4.5 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to afford compound 5 (0.99g, 99%) as a white solid (Compound 5), which was used directly in the next step without further purification.
[00150] To a solution of Compound 5 in CH3OH (10 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (450 mg, 9.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and was washed with 5% NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous NaSO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00151] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 6 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (530 mg, 3.9 mmol), benzoic acid (366 mg, 3.0 mmol), triethylamine (0.41 mL, 3.0 mmol), and finally EDCI (1.34 g, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with
CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 6 (832 mg, 86%) as a white solid. Example 6 was characterized by the following data: m.p. 130-1320C; [α]20 D+31.7° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 9.98 (br, IH), 8.21 (br, 1 H), 7.75 (d, J= 7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.52 (t, J= 7.3 Hz, IH), 7.52 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2H), 4.40 (dd,J = 9.4, 3.8 Hz, IH), 3.13-2.97 (m, 2H), 1.85-1.61 (m, 4H), 0.92-0.85 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 171.94, 167.74, 132.41, 131.01, 128.65, 127.27, 85.40, 46.61, 40.97, 28.32, 24.71, 23.19, 21.62, 20.06, 19.88; IR (CHCl3) 3345, 1659 cm"1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 307 (M+,l); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for CnH26N2O3 (M+): calculated 306.1943, found 306.1923.
Preparation of Example 7
Figure imgf000041_0001
Example 7
Scheme G
[00152] Example 7 was prepared according to Scheme G above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH3OH (10 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and was washed with 5% NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00153] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 6 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (177 mg, 1.3 mmol), pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid (366 mg, 0.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1.0 mmol), and finally EDCI (447 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 7 (214 mg, 80%) as a white solid. Example 7 was characterized by the following data: m.p. 175-177 0C; [α]20 D +117.2° (c 0.50, CHCl3); 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 11.97 (s, 2H), 8.31 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 8.20 (t, J= 5.7 Hz, 2H), 8.10 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, IH), 4.41 (dd, J= 8.6, 4.2 Hz, 2H), 3.05-2.98 (m, 4H), 1.81-1.60 (m, 8H), 0.90-0.78 (m, 24H); 13C NMR (75 MHz5 CDCl3.) δ 171.73, 162.30, 147.51, 139.20, 125.59, 85.30, 46.68, 41.12, 28.16, 24.65, 23.03, 21.97, 19.99, 19.95; IR (CHCl3) 3321, 1673 cm"1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 535 (M+); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C27H45N5O6 (M+): calculated 535.3370, found 535.3371.
Preparation of Example 8
Figure imgf000042_0001
Compound 7 Compound 8 Compound 9
Figure imgf000042_0002
Scheme H
[00154] Example 8 was prepared according to Scheme H above. N-Boc-L-leucine (Compound 7) (693 mg 3.0 mmol) was dissolved in freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (530 mg, 3.9 mmol), isobutylamine (0.32 mL, 3.15 mmol), and finally EDCI (1.34 g, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to afford Compound 8 (851 mg, 99%) as a white solid, which was used directly in the next step without further purification.
[00155] To a solution of Compound 8 in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) was carefully added equal volume OfCF3COOH (5 mL) through a syringe at room temperature. After stirred at room temperature for 3 hour, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CHCl3, washed with K2CO3 solution (pH = 12) and brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, and concentrated to give free amine Compound 9 as a colorless oil, which was used directly in the next step.
[00156] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 9 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (530 mg, 3.9 mmol), isophthalic acid (249 mg, 1.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.41 mL, 3.0 mmol), and finally EDCI (1.34 g, 4.5 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 8 (617 mg, 82%) as a white solid. Example 8 was characterized by the following data: m.p. 240-242 °C; [α]20 D 32.1° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.20 (s, IH), 7.92 (d, J= 7.8 Hz 2H), 7.48 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 7.09 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.35 (t, J= 5.8 Hz, 2H), 4.65 (m, 2H), 3.15-3.10 (m, 2H), 3.05-3.00 (m, 2H), 1.81-1.69 (m, 8H), 0.97 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 12H)5 0.90 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 12H); 13CNMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 172.01, 166.53, 134.19, 130.47, 128.98, 125.53, 52.48, 46.94, 41.27, 28.45, 24.93, 22.86, 22.31, 20.08, 20.06; IR (CHCl3) 3400, 1653 cm"1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 503 (M+); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C28H46N4O4 (M+): calculated 502.3519, found 502.3486.
Preparation of Example 9
Figure imgf000043_0001
Compound 10 Compound 11 Compound 12
Figure imgf000043_0002
Example 9
Scheme I
[00157] Example 9 was prepared according to Scheme I above. Concentrated sulphuric acid (0.48 mL) was added cautiously to water (22 mL) in a 100 mL round-bottom flask containing L-leucine (Compound 10) (787 mg, 6.0 mmol). A solution of NaNO2 (1.24 g, 18 mmol ) in water (40 mL) was added through a dropping funnel at such a rate that the temperature of the reaction mixture does not exceed 5 0C. After stirred at 00C for 1 hour, the reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred for another 1 hour. The product was extracted with ethyl acetate and the organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The organic solvent was evaporated off to give a sticky light yellow oil Compound 11, which was used directly in the next step. [00158] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 niL) was added to a flask containing Compound 11 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (1.06 g, 7.8 mmol), isobutylamine (0.63 mL, 6.3 mmol), and finally EDCI (2.68 g, 9.0 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to afford Compound 12 as a white solid, which was used directly in the next step without further purification.
[00159] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing Compound 12 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (1.06 g, 7.8 mmol), isophthalic acid (500 mg, 3 mmol), triethylamine (0.82 mL, 6.0 mmol), and finally EDCI (2.68 g, 9.0 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 9 (1.02 g, 68%) as a white solid. Example 9 was characterized by the following data: m.p. 137-139 °C; [α]20 D +22.6° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.74 (t, J = 1.6 Hz, IH), 8.32 (dd, J= 7.8, 1.7 Hz, 2H), 7.63 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 6.06 (t, J= 5.7 Hz, 2H), 5.43 (dd, J= 9.4, 3.9 Hz, 2H), 3.11 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 4H), 1.96-1.75 (m, 8H) 1.00-0.97 (m, 12H), 0.90-0.87 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (I OO MHZ, CDCl3) δ 169.78, 164.66, 134.48, 130.85, 130.08, 129.20, 74.03, 46.50, 40.78, 28.45, 24.73, 23.13, 21.81, 19.94; IR (CHCl3) 3450, 1729, 1679 cm"1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/∑ 504 (M+); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C28H44N2O6 (M+): calculated 504.3199, found 504.3199.
Alternative Preparation Method for Example 2
Figure imgf000044_0001
Scheme J
[00160] Example 2 was also prepared according to Scheme J above which was similar to Scheme G for Example 7 except that pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid was replaced with isophthalic acid. Example 2 was isolated as a white solid which was characterized by the following data: m.p. 176-178 °C; [α]20 D (deg cm3 g"1 dm"1) +67.3° (c = 0.01 g cm"3 in CHCl3); 1H-NMR (600 MHz, CDCl3) δ 10.43 ppm (s, 2H), 8.12 (s, IH), 8.07 (t, J= 5.7 Hz, 2H), 8.04 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.57 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH) , 4.40 (dd, J = 9.5, 3.4 Hz, 2H), 3.05-3.01 (m, 2H), 2.91-2.88 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.62 (m, 8H), 0.92 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 12H), 0.84 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 6H), 0.78 (d, J= 6.1 Hz, 6H); 13C-NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 171.89, 166.14, 131.97, 131.30, 129.69, 124.93, 85.60, 46.69, 41.15, 28.29, 24.85, 23.18, 21.81, 20.04, 19.99; IR (CHCl3) 3332 cm"1, 3185, 1663 (C=O) cm"1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 534 (M+); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) (m/z):[hf] calculated for C28H46N4O6, 534.3417; found 534.3435.
Preparation of Example 10
acid
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000045_0002
Scheme K
[00161] Example 10 was prepared according to Scheme K above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH3OH (10 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00162] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 6 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (177 mg, 1.3 mmol), terephthalic acid (83 mg, 0.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1.0 mmol), and finally N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N'-ethylcarbodiimide hydrocholoride (EDCΗC1, 300 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 10 (107 mg, 40%) as a white solid. Example 10 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 58.9° (c 1.00, DMSO); 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 12.03 (s, 2H), 8.24 (s, 2H), 7.82 (s, 4H), 4.38 (dd, J= 8.5, 4.5 Hz, 2H), 2.96-2.90 (m, 4H), 1.83-1.50 (m, 8H), 0.98 (d, J= 6.5 Hz, 6H) 0.93 (d, J= 6.5 Hz, 6H), 0.81 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 6H), 0.79 (d, J= 6.6Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 170.93, 164.99, 135.00, 127.79, 84.01, 46.25, 28.42, 24.66, 23.47, 22.47, 20.40, 20.16; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 534 (M+, 1), 131 (100); HRMS (EI) for C28H46N4O6 (M+): calculated 534.3417, found 534.3419.
Preparation of Example 11
MeOH I Y " Y I EDC1 HOAt1 TEA1 CH2CI2
Figure imgf000046_0001
compo Vund 6
Figure imgf000046_0002
Example 11 Scheme L [00163] Example 11 was prepared according to Scheme L above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH3OH (10 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00164] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 6 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (177 mg, 1.3 mmol), benzene-l,3,5-tricarboxylic acid (105 mg, 0.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1.0 mmol), and finally EDCΗC1 (300 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 11 (171 mg, 45%) as a white solid. Example 11 was characterized by the following data: [α]20o + 46.1° (c 1.00, DMSO); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^) δ 12.14 (s, 3H), 8.26 (s, 3H), 8.22 (s, 3H), 4.38 (dd, J= 8.4,4.0 Hz, 3H), 3.00-2.89 (m, 6H), 1.85-1.51 (m, 12H), 0.98 (d, J= 6.5 Hz, 9H), 0.93 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 9H), 0.81 (d, J= 7 Hz, 9H), 0.79 (d, J= 8Hz, 9H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, OMSO-dά) δ 170.97, 164.43, 132.80, 129.45, 84.19, 46.25, 28.43, 24.69, 23.48, 22.42, 20.40; LRMS (FAB) m/z 763 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C39H67N6O9 (M++H): calculated 763.4891, found 763.4949.
Preparation of Examples 12 and 13
gluta∞mc aci. EDC1 HHOOAAtt1, TTEEAA,, CH2CI2
Figure imgf000047_0001
compound 5 compound 6
Figure imgf000047_0002
Example 12 Example 13 Scheme M
[00165] Examples 12 and 13 were prepared according to Scheme M above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH3OH (10 niL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00166] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 6 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (177 mg, 1.3 mmol), glutaconic acid (65 mg, 0.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1.0 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (300 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 12 (40 mg, 16%) as a white solid. Example 12 was characterized by the following data: 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 10.60 (br, IH), 10.49 (br, IH), 8.07 (br, IH), 7.88 (br, IH), 6.88 (dt, J= 15.4, 6.9 Hz, IH), 5.89 (d, J= 15 Hz, IH ), 4.28 (d, J= 5.2 Hz, 2H ), 3.11-2.97 (m, 6H), 1.84-1.60 (m, 8H), 0.95-0.87 (m, 24H); 13C NMR (I OO MHZ, CDCl3) δ 171.97, 167.92, 137.25, 123.45, 85.31, 85.22, 46.70, 46.66, 40.98, 28.34, 24.71, 23.16, 21.71, 20.07; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 498 (M+, 1), 131 (100); HRMS (EI) for C25H46N4O6 (M+): calculated 498.3417, found 498.3436.
[00167] Example 12 (40 mg, 0.08 mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL MeOH, and 4 mg 10% Pd/C was added to the mixture. Then the mixture was stirred with H2 at rt under balloon pressure overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and concentrated to afford Example 13 (40 mg, quant). Example 13 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 27.9° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.69 (br, 2H), 4.35 (dd, J =8.6, 3.8 Hz, 2H ), 3.29-3.24 (m, 2H), 2.87-2.85 (m, 2H), 2.18-2.16 (m, 2H), 1.88-1.63 (m, 12H), 1.00-0.92 (m, 24H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 172.72, 170.30, 86.21, 46.59, 40.77, 30.58, 28.44, 24.75, 23.04, 21.80, 20.71, 20.05; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 500 (M+, 1), 131 (100); HRMS (EI) for C25H4SN4O6 (M+): calculated 500.3574, found 500.3596.
Preparation of Example 14
adipic acid EDC1 HOAt, TEA, CH2GI2
Figure imgf000049_0001
Scheme N
[00168] Example 14 was prepared according to Scheme N above. To a solution of Compound 5 (332 mg, 1 mmol) in CH3OH (10 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (150 mg, 3.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 6 and phthahydroazide as colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00169] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 6 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (177 mg, 1.3 mmol), adipic acid (73 mg, 0.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1.0 mmol), and finally EDCΗC1 (300 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 14 (110 mg, 40%) as a white solid. Example 14 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 31.4° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 9.78 (s, 2H), 7.98 (br, 2H), 4.30-4.26 (m, 2H), 3.21-3.14 (m, 2H), 3.02-2.93 (m, 2H), 2.12-2.11 (m, 4H), 1.73-1.60 (m, 12H), 0.99-0.91 (m, 24H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ 172.11, 171.89, 85.35, 46.55, 41.02, 32.37, 28.36, 24.71, 23.16, 21.71, 20.07; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 515 (M++l, 10), 131 (100); HRMS (EI) for C26H50N4O6 (M+): calculated 514.373, found 514.3768.
Preparation of Example 15
Figure imgf000050_0001
Compound 13
Figure imgf000050_0002
Example 15
Scheme O
[00170] Example 15 was prepared according to Scheme O above. To a solution of Compound 1 (2.00 g, 6.0 mmol) in CH3OH (20 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (900 mg, 18.0 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After being stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of the free amine (Compound 2) and phthahydroazide as colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the peptide coupling reaction below without further purification.
[00171] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 2 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 1.05 g, 7.8 mmol), isovaleric acid (0.66 ml, 6.0 mmol), triethylamine (0.83 mL, 6.0 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (1.80 g, 9 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford compound 13 (1.07 g, 62% yield) of. Compound 13 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 138.1° (c 1.00, CH2Cl2); 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.78 (s, IH), 4.44 (br, IH), 2.13-1.93 (m, 4H), 1.70-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.48 (s, 9H), 1.03-0.93 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 171.85, 169.62, 81.99, 42.37, 39.85, 28.02, 25.84, 24.56, 23.09, 22.45, 22.27, 21.74; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 287 (M+, 2), 186 (88), 102 (100); HRMS (EI) for CJ5H29NO4 (M+): calculated 287.2100, found 287.2101.
[00172] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (30 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 13 (860 mg, 3.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (6 mL, 75 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 13 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00173] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added to a flask containing the acid afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 0.525 g, 3.9 mmol), aniline (0.3 mL, 3.3 mmol), triethylamine (0.42 mL, 3 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl ( 0.90 g, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 15 (0.8 g, 88% yield). Example 15 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 128.6° (c 1.00, CH2Cl2); 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 10.17 (s, IH), 8.58 (s, 1 H), 7.69 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.32 (t, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.1 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 1 H), 4.34 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, IH), 2.10-1.90 (m, 4H), 1.80-1.76 (m, 2H), 0.99 (t, J= 6.5 Hz, 6H), 0.91 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 3H), 0.84 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 3H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 173.02, 169.97, 137.76, 128.86, 124.28, 119.97, 86.12, 41.89, 40.80, 25.86, 24.82, 23.20, 22.28, 22.02, 21.70; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 306 (M+, 38), 151 (100); HRMS (EI) for C17H26N2O3 (M+): calculated 306.1900, found 306.1937.
Preparation of Example 16
Figure imgf000052_0001
Compound 13
Figure imgf000052_0002
Example 16
Scheme P
[00174] Examplelό was prepared according to Scheme P above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (30 niL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 13 (860 mg, 3.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (6 mL, 75 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 13 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00175] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added to a flask containing the acid afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 0.525 g, 3.9 mmol), 1,3-phenylenediamine (162 mg, 1.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.42 mL, 3 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (0.90 g, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 16 (0.24 g, 30% yield). Example 16 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 163.0° (c 1.00, CH2Cl2); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ 11.33 (s, 2H), 10.34 (s, 2H), 7.98 (s, IH), 7.35 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.24 (t, J= 8 Hz, IH), 4.37 (dd, J = 9.1, 4.2 Hz, 2H), 1.95-1.85 (m, 8H)5 1.77-1.55 (m, 2H), 1.55-1.45 (m, 2H), 0.97 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 6H), 0.93 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 6H), 0.84-0.80 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ 170.70, 170.12, 139.18, 129.32, 115.30, 111.19, 84.33, 41.51, 40.71, 25.78, 24.65, 23.52, 22.49, 22.46, 22.28; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 535 (M++l, 22), 222 (100); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C28H46N4O6 (M+): calculated 534.3417, found 534.3428.
Preparation of Example 17
Figure imgf000053_0001
Compound 13
Figure imgf000053_0002
Example 17
Scheme Q
[00176] Example 16 was prepared according to Scheme Q above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (30 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 13 (860 mg, 3.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (6 mL, 75 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 13 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00177] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added to a flask containing the acid afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 0.525 g, 3.9 mmol), 1,4-phenylenediamine (162 mg, 1.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.42 mL, 3 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (0.90 g, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 17 (0.33 g, 41% yield). Example 17 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 236.2° (c 1.00, DMSO); 1H NMR (400 MHz, OMSO-d6) δ 11.36 (s, 2H), 10.31 (s, 2H), 7.56 (s, 4H), 4.33 (dd, J= 9.3, 4.1 Hz, 2H), 1.95-1.85 (m, 8H), 1.65-1.62 (m, 2H), 1.55-1.52 (m, 2H), 0.97 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 6H), 0.93 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 6H) , 0.83 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 6H) , 0.80 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, DMSO-^) δ 170.75, 169.86, 134.64, 120.15, 84.44, 41.51, 40.74, 25.79, 25.57, 24.67, 23.52, 22.48, 22.43, 22.23; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 535 (M++l, 55), 222 (84), 108 (100); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C28H46N4O6 (M+): calculated 534.3417, found 534.3405.
Preparation of Example 18
Figure imgf000054_0001
Scheme R
[00178] Example 16 was prepared according to Scheme R above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (30 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 13 (860 mg, 3.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (6 mL, 75 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 13 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00179] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added to a flask containing the acid afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 0.525 g, 3.9 mmol), benzidine (276 mg, 1.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.42 mL, 3 mmol), and finally EDC -HCl (0.90 g, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 18 (0.6 g, 66% yield). Example 18 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 275.4° (c 1.00, Acetone); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 11.40 (s, 2H), 10.45 (s, 2H), 7.70 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, 4H), 7.62 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 4H), 4.37 (dd, J= 9.3, 4.2 Hz, 2H), 1.95-1.86 (m, 8H), 1.78-1.55 (m, 2H), 1.45-1.23 (m, 2H), 0.98 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 6H), 0.94 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 6H) , 0.84 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 6H) , 0.82 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ 170.85, 170.16, 138.01, 135.27, 126.94, 120.20, 84.57, 41.52, 40.74, 25.79, 24.68, 23.52, 22.49, 22.45, 22.26; LRMS (FAB) m/z 611 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C34H5JN4O6 (M++H): calculated 611.373, found 611.3811.
Preparation of Example 19
Figure imgf000055_0001
EDC,HOAt,TEA,DMF aniline
Figure imgf000055_0002
Compound 15
CXXnn
I
Example 19
Scheme S
[00180] Example 19 was prepared according to Scheme S above. Compound 14 was synthesized according to the procedures described in Miller et ah, J. Org. Chem, 1986, 51, 5332-5337. L-Leucine (2.88 g, 22 mmol) was dissolved in aqueous 60% perchloric acid (4 g, 24 mmol) with stirring in an ice bath. tert-Butyl acetate (75 mL) was added and the stirring was continued until a homogeneous solution was obtained. The mixture was kept at room temperature for 2 days, then 0.1N HCl (100 mL) was added to the mixture. The aqueous phase was separated from the ether phase, and the aqueous phase was adjusted with aqueous Na2CO3 to pH about 9. The aqueous phase was extracted 3 times with EtOAc and the organic layer was combined, washed with brine, dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to afford Compound 14 (3.05 g, 74% yield) as a colorless oil, which was used directly in the next step.
[00181] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 14 (540 mg, 2.9 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of 1 -hydroxy -7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 513 mg, 3.77 mmol), isovaleric acid (0.32 mL, 2.9 mmol), triethylamine (0.4 mL, 2.9 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (870 mg, 4.35 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford compound 15 (918 mg , 93% yield). Compound 15 was characterized by the following data: 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 5.8 (br, IH), 4.64^1.45 (m, IH), 2.12-2.05 (m, 3H), 1.70-1.50 (m, 3H), 1.46 (s, 9H), 0.97-0.89 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 172.5, 172.05, 81.78, 51.10, 45.99, 42.02, 27.95, 26.12, 24.94, 22.77, 22.44, 22.38, 22.08.
[00182] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 ( 10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried
Compound 15 (270 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 15 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00183] [0004] Distilled DMF (1O mL) was added to a flask containing the acid (215 mg, 1 mmol) afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 177 mg, 1.3 mmol), aniline (0.1 mL, 1.1 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (300 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 19 (248 mg, 87% yield). Example 19 was characterized by the following data: 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.59 (br, IH), 7.49 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 2H), 7.28 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 2H), 7.08 (dd, J = 4.5, 7.4 Hz, IH), 6.0 (br, IH), 4.73-4.55 (m, IH), 2.21-2.05 (m, 2H), 1.84-1.67 (m, 4H), 0.97-0.92 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 173.46, 171.21, 138.00, 128.75, 124.13, 119.99, 52.60, 45.56, 40.73, 26.18, 24.86, 22.92, 22.40, 22.28, 22.12.
Preparation of Example 20
Figure imgf000057_0001
Compound 15
Figure imgf000057_0002
Example 20
Scheme T
[00184] Example 20 was prepared according to Scheme T above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 15 (270 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 15 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00185] Distilled DMF (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the acid (215 mg, 1 mmol) afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 177 mg, 1.3 mmol), 1,3-phenylenediamine (54 mg, 0.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1 mmol), and EDCΗC1 (300 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 20 (173 mg, 69% yield). Example 20 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 26.7° (c 1.00, DMSO); 1HNMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 10.03 (s, IH), 8.03 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.91 (d, J= 1.6 Hz, IH), 7.28 (dd, J= 1.7, 7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.18 (dd, J= 7.4, 8.7 Hz, IH), 4.49-4.38 (m, 2H), 2.50-2.48 (m, 6H), 1.54-1.43 (m, 6H), 0.89-0.84 (m, 24H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 172.12, 171.89, 139.69, 129.24, 114.79, 110.91, 52.20, 44.81, 26.11, 24.78, 23.43, 22.72, 22.68, 21.93. Preparation of Example 21
Figure imgf000058_0001
Compound 15
Figure imgf000058_0002
Example 21
Scheme U [00186] Example 21 was prepared according to Scheme U above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 15 (270 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 15 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00187] Distilled DMF (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the acid (215 mg, 1 mmol) afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 177 mg, 1.3 mmol), 1,4-phenylenediamine (54 mg, 0.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (300 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 21 (143 mg, 57% yield). Example 21 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 16.6° (c 1.00, DMSO); 1HNMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J*) δ 9.99 (s, 2H), 8.05 (d, J= 7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.52 (s, 4H), 4.56^1.38 (m, 2H), 2.55-2.40 (m, 6H), 1.65-1.44 (m, 6H), 0.91-0.86 (m, 24H); 13C NMR (400 MHz, OMSO-d6) δ 172.07, 171.56, 134.93, 120.02, 52.08, 44.82, 26.10, 24.77, 23.46, 22.74, 22.67, 21.93;
Preparation of Example 22 UU TFA EDC1HOAt1TEA1DMF
1 ,3-phenylenedιamιne
Compound 15
Figure imgf000059_0001
Example 22
Scheme V
[00188] Example 22 was prepared according to Scheme V above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 15 (270 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 15 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the acid, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00189] Distilled DMF (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the acid (215 mg, 1 mmol) afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the additions of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAt, 177 mg, 1.3 mmol), benzidine (92 mg, 0.5 mmol), triethylamine (0.14 mL, 1 mmol), and finally EDCΗC1 (300 mg, 1.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 22 (120 mg, 42% yield). Example 22 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D + 24.2° (c 1.00, DMSO); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^) δ 10.20 (s, 2H), 8.08 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.68 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 4H), 7.59 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 4H), 4.58^1.40 (dd, J= 8.6, 13.3 Hz, 2H), 2.03-1.95 (m, 6H), 1.65-1.47 (m, 6H), 0.93-0.87 (m, 24H); 13C NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^) δ 172.15, 171.92, 138.58, 134.93, 126.85, 120.04, 52.22, 44.82, 26.12, 24.80, 23.45, 22.73, 22.68, 21.96.
Preparation of Example 23
Figure imgf000060_0001
Compound 7 Compound 8
TFA DlPEA, DCM phenyl isocyanate
Figure imgf000060_0002
Example 23
Scheme W
[00190] Example 23 was prepared according to Scheme W above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing Boc-Leu-OH (1.25 g, 5 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (0.88 g, 6.5 mmol), isobutylamine (1 mL, 10 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (1.50 g, 7.5 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to afford Compound 8 as an oil (1.33 g , 93%), which was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 6.25 (br, IH), 4.91 (br, IH), 4.16-3.98 (m, IH), 3.08 (t, ./=5.6 Hz, 2H), 1.80-1.66 (m,
4H), 1.44 (s, 9H), 0.94-0.90 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 172.46, 155.00, 53.15, 46.69, 41.04, 28.45, 28.27, 24.74, 22.84, 22.08, 19.99.
[00191] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
[00192] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the amine afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of DIPEA (0.16 mL, 1.0 mmol), and phenyl isocyanate (0.11 mL, 1 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 23 (220 mg, 70%) as a white solid. Example 23 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-cfc) δ 8.57 (s, IH), 8.09 (t,J= 5.6 Hz, IH), 7.35 (d,J= 8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.21(t,J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 6.88 (t,J= 7.3 Hz, IH), 6.29 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, IH), 4.34-4.26 (m, IH), 2.97-2.80 (m, 2H), 1.71-1.58 (m, 2H), 1.44-1.38 (m, 2H), 0.92-0.82 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-J6) 5172.94, 155.04, 140.81, 129.12, 121.48, 117.87, 51.72, 46.40, 43.03, 28.44, 24.79, 23.39, 22.56, 20.51.
Preparation of Example 24
TFA DIPEA, DCM
Figure imgf000061_0001
phenyl isothiocyanate
Compound 8
Figure imgf000061_0002
Example 24
Scheme X
[00193] Example 24 was prepared according to Scheme X above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
[00194] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the amine afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of DIPEA (0.16 mL, 1.0 mmol), and phenyl isothiocyanate (0.12 mL, 1 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 24 (210 mg, 65%) as a white solid. Example 24 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.96 (s, IH), 7.42 (d, J= 7.5 Hz, IH), 7.39 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 7.32-7.23 (m, 3H), 6.68 (d, J= 8.3 Hz, IH), 6.54 (br, IH), 5.15-5.00 (m, IH), 3.12-3.03 (m, 2H), 1.83-1.57 (m, 4H), 0.97-0.90 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 180.57, 172.17, 136.51, 129.67, 126.85, 125.00, 56.97, 46.98, 40.73, 28.34, 24.85, 22.77, 22.55, 20,05, 20.04;
Preparation of Example 25
- ™ * DIPEA' DCM .
Figure imgf000062_0001
1,3-pheπylene cliisocyaπate
Compound 8
Figure imgf000062_0002
Example 25 Scheme Y
[00195] Example 25 was prepared according to Scheme Y above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stiiτed at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
[00196] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the amine afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of DIPEA (0.16 mL, 1.0 mmol), and 1,3-phenylene diisocyanate (80 mg, 0.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 25 (194 mg, 73%) as a white solid. Example 25 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 8.53 (s, 2H), 8.09 (t, J= 5.6 Hz, 2H), 7.40 (s, IH), 7.13- 6.98 (m, 3H), 6.98- 6.90 (m, 2H), 6.22 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.30-4.20 (m, 2H), 2.96-2.82 (m, 4H)3 1.70-1.58 (m, 4H), 1.43-1.37 (m, 4H), 0.90 (d, J= 2.2 Hz, 6H), 0.88 (d, J= 2.1 Hz, 6H), 0.82 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 172.96, 154.97, 141.13, 129.30, 110.90, 107.00, 51.69, 46.40, 43.04, 28.44, 24.78, 23.41 , 22.53, 20.52. Preparation of Example 26
Figure imgf000063_0001
1,3-phenylene diisothiocyanate
Compound 8
Figure imgf000063_0002
Example 26
Scheme Z
[00197] Example 26 was prepared according to Scheme Z above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
[00198] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the amine afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of DIPEA (0.16 mL, 1.0 mmol), and 1 ,3-phenylene diisothiocyanate (96 mg, 0.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 26 (220 mg, 78%) as a white solid. Example 26 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.47 (s, 2H), 7.63 (br, 2H), 7.35-7.28 (m, IH), 7.23-7.13 (m, 3H), 6.71 (t, J= 5.5 Hz, 2H), 5.02-4.95 (m, 2H), 3.11-2.98 (m, 4H), 1.82-1.66 (m, 8H), 0.96-0.84 (m, 24H); 13C NMR (IOO MHz, CDCIa) δ 180.63, 173.21, 138.02, 129.46, 121.26, 120.56, 57.17, 47.12, 41.01, 28.38, 24.86, 22.93, 22.31, 20.18, 20.14.
Preparation of Example 27 TFA DIPEA, DOM
Figure imgf000064_0001
1,4-pheπylene Λisocyaπale
Compound 8
Figure imgf000064_0002
Example 27
Scheme AA
[00199] Example 27 was prepared according to Scheme AA above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
[00200] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the amine afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of DIPEA (0.16 mL, 1.0 mmol), and 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate (80 mg, 0.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2CI2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 27 (200 mg, 76%) as a white solid. Example 27 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 8.38 (s, 2H), 8.07 (t, J= 5.5 Hz, 2H), 7.20 (s, 4H), 6.18 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 4.28-4.15 (m, 2H), 2.98-2.90 (m, 2H), 2.86-2.81 (m, 2H), 1.70-1.58 (m, 4H), 1.43-1.37 (m, 4H), 0.90-0.88 (m, 12H), 0.82 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-Jd) δ 173.07, 155.20, 134.63, 118.66, 51.76, 46.39, 42.99, 28.43, 24.77, 23.39, 22.54, 20.50.
Preparation of Example 28
Figure imgf000065_0001
Compound 8
Figure imgf000065_0002
Example 23
Scheme AB
[00201] Example 28 was prepared according to Scheme AB above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 rnL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
[00202] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the amine afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of DIPEA (0.16 mL, 1.0 mmol), and 1,4-phenylene diisothiocyanate (96 mg, 0.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 28 (254 mg, 90%) as a yellow solid. Example 28 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.50 (s, 2H), 7.65 (br, 2H), 7. 09 (s, 4H), 6.82 (br, 2H), 5.02-4.95 (m, 2H), 3.15-3.09 (m, 2H), 3.04-2.99 (m, 2H), 1.80-1.67 (m, 8H), 0.98 (d, J= 5.9 Hz, 12H), 0.90-0.88 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, DMSO-.**) δ 180.93, 173.53, 135.23, 125.25, 57.00, 47.12, 41.18, 28.43, 24.87, 22.92, 22.29, 20.17, 20.11.
Preparation of Example 29
Figure imgf000066_0001
Compound 8
Figure imgf000066_0002
Example 29
Scheme AC
[00203] Example 29 was prepared according to Scheme AC above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
[00204] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the amine afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of DIPEA (0.16 mL, 1.0 mmol), and 1,4-phenyIene diisothiocyanate (192 mg, 1 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 29 (320 mg, 85%) as a foamy solid. Example 29 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) 5 8.56 (s, IH), 7.92 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, IH), 7.49 (s, IH), 7.40-7.19 (m, 2H), 7.00-6.97 (m, IH), 6.44 (t, J = 5.8 Hz, IH), 5.05-4.98 (m, IH), 3.12-3.06 (m, 2H), 1.81-1.70 (m, 4H), 1.02-0.98 (m, 6H), 0.92-0.88 (m, 6H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCla) δ 181.06, 173.89, 139.31, 135.81, 131.51, 129.68, 122.88, 122.66, 121.25, 56.94, 47.32, 41.21, 28.38, 24.88, 22.86, 22.34, 20.09, 20.06.
Preparation of Example 30
Figure imgf000067_0001
Compound 8
Figure imgf000067_0002
Example 30
Scheme AD
[00205] Example 30 was prepared according to Scheme AD above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 8 (286 mg, 1.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 8 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the amine (TFA salt), which was used for next step without further purification.
[00206] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the amine afforded in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TEA (0.42 ml, 3.0 mmol), and benzoyl chloride (0.12 mL, 1 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 30 (210 mg, 70%) as a white solid. Example 30 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D -57.3° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.79-7.77 (m, 2H), 7.52-7.48 (m, IH), 7.43-7.39 (m, 2H), 6.88 (br, IH), 6.60 (br, IH), 4.73-4.67 (m, IH), 3.10-3.03 (m, 2H), 1.81-1.71 (m, 4H), 0.99-0.97 (m, 6H), 0.88 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (IOO MHz, CDCla) δ 172.28, 167.48, 133.88, 131.64, 128.47, 127.14, 52.31, 46.86, 41.26, 28.40, 24.95, 22.85, 22.41, 20.05; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 290 (M+,l), 105 (100); HRMS (EI) for C17H26N2O2 (M+): calculated 290.1994, found 290.1991.
Preparation of Example 31
Figure imgf000068_0001
Compound 16
Figure imgf000068_0002
Compound 17 Compound 18
Figure imgf000068_0003
Example s'!
Scheme AE
[00207] Example 31 was prepared according to Scheme AE above. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing L-(+)-Mandelic acid (1.52 g, 10 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (1.633 g, 12 mmol), isobutylamine (1.2 mL, 12 mmol), and finally EDCΗC1 (2.60 g, 13 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to afford Compound 16 as an oil ( 1.94 g , 94%).
[00208] Compound 16 ( 1.22 g, 5.9 mmol), N-hydroxy phthalimide( 1.01 g, 6.2 mmol) and PPh3 (1.73 g, 6.5 mmol) were dissolved in dry THF (100 mL) in a 250ml dry round bottom flask. Then DIAD (diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, 1.24 mL, 6.2 mmol) was added dropwisely using a syringe under ice bath. After stirred for 1.5 hours, the solvent was removed on a rotary evaporator. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford compound 17 (1.5 g, 72%) as a white solid. [00209] To a solution of Compound 17 (1.5 g, 4.25 mmol) in CH3OH (40 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (0.4 mL, 12.8 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and was washed with 5% NaHCO3 twice and then with brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of Compound 18 and phthahydroazide as a colorless oil. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00210] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 18 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (752 mg, 5.13 mmol), isophthalic acid (353 mg, 2.13 mmol), triethylamine (0.6 mL, 4.3 mmol), and Finally EDC-HCl (1.27 g, 6.38 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 31 (734 mg, 60% yield) as a white solid. Example 31 was characterized by the following data: [α]20 D -58.2° (c 1.00, DMSO); 1H NMR (400 MHz,
DMSO-d*) δ 12.19 (s, 2H), 8.47 (br, 2H), 8.16 (s, IH), 7.89 (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 7.60-7.55 (m, IH), 7.49 (d, J= 7.2 Hz, 4H), 7.42-7.39 (m, 6H), 5.43 (s, 2H), 3.02-2.89 (m, 4H), 1.74-1.67 (m, 2H), 0.80-0.78 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-cf6) δ 168.9, 165.2, 136.4, 132.4, 130.8, 129.2, 129.1, 128.7, 128.2, 126.9, 86.1, 46.3, 28.5, 20.4; LRMS (FAB) m/z 575 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C32H39N4O6 (M++H) : calculated 575.2791 , found 575.2871.
Preparation of Example 32
Figure imgf000070_0001
Scheme AF
[00211] Example 32 was prepared according to Scheme AF above. Compound 19 was synthesized according to the procedures described in Satoshi mura et ah, Org. Lett, 2005, 7, 941-943. Compound 19 (2.0 g, 9.1 mmol), N-hydroxy phthalimide(1.64 g, 10.1 mmol) and PPh3(2.9 g, 11 mmol) were dissolved in dry THF (100 niL) in a 250 mL dry round bottom flask. Then DIAD (diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, 2 mL, 10.1 mmol) was added dropwisely using a syringe in an ice bath. After stirred for 1.5 hours, the solvent was removed on a rotary evaporator. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford compound 20 (2.18 g, 67% yield) as a white solid. Compound 20 was characterized by the following data: [α]20o - 12.4° (c 1.00, acetone); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.17 (s, IH), 7.86-7.78 (m, 2H), 7.78-7.70 (m, 2H), 7.64 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, IH), 7.35-7.29 (m, 2H), 7.20-7.11 (m, 2H), 5.07 (t, J= 6.8 Hz, IH), 3.67 (s, 3H), 3.59-3.47 (m, 2H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCla) δ 169.50, 163.19, 136.02, 134.57, 128.81, 127.31, 123.65, 123.49, 122.09, 119.58, 118.50, 111.13, 108.77, 85.30, 52.46, 26.70; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 364 (M+, 10), 201 (100); HRMS (EI) for C20Hi6N2O5 (M+): calculated 364.1059, found 364.1056.
[00212] To a solution of Compound 20 ( 1.68 g, 4.6 mmol) in CH3OH (40 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (0.3 mL, 5.1 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of amine and phthahydroazide as solid. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00213] Freshly distilled DMF (50 mL) was added to a flask containing the mixture got in the last step under Argon atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (817 mg, 6 mmol), isophthalic acid (382 mg, 2.3 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (1.38 g, 6.9 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford compound 21 (1.18 g, 86%) as a white solid, compound 21 was characterized by the following data: [α]20o 24.4° (c 1.00, acetone); 1H NMR (400 MHz, acetone-J6) δ 10.10 (s, 2H), 8.23 (s, IH), 7.98-7.96 (m, 2H), 7.60-7.54 (m, 3H), 7.43-7.37 (m, 4H), 7.09-7.02 (m, 4H), 4.96 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2H), 3.61 (s, 6H), 3.34 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 4H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, acetone-^) δ 171.04, 136.57, 135.02, 132.44, 130.15, 128.75, 127.73, 125.90, 123.94, 123.78, 123.62, 121.21, 118.68, 118.28,
111.25, 111.20, 110.29, 109.68, 108.95, 83.52, 51.23, 26.89; LRMS (FAB) m/z 599 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C32H30N4O8 (M+): calculated 598.2064, found 598.2069.
[00214] Compound 21 (490 mg, 0.82 mmol) was dissolved in THF (6 mL) in an ice bath. Aqueous LiOH (140 mg dissolved in 3 mL water) was added dropwisely into the above solution and the reaction mixture was stirred at it for 1.5 hours. After removal of THF on a rotary evaporator. The residue was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc to remove the organic impurity. Then the aquous phase was acidified with IM HCl to pH about 4 and extracted with EtOAc. Finally the organic layer was combined and concentrated to afford the foamy acid (400 mg, 86% yield) which directly used in the next coupling reaction.
[00215] DMF (10 mL) was added to a flask containing the acid above (400 mg, 0.7 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (124 mg, 0.91 mmol), isobutylamine (0.2 mL, 2.1 mmol), and finally EDCΗC1 (220 mg, 1.1 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 32 (130 mg, 28% yield). Example 32 was characterized by the following data: [α]20o + 64.8° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 9.48 (s, 2H), 8.26 (s, 2H), 8.08 (t, J= 5.7 Hz, 2H), 7.60 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.52 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.30-7.25 (m, 2H), 7.17-7.15 (m, 2H), 7.05-6.94 (m, 6H), 4.47 (Ud1 J= 9.2, 3.1 Hz, 2H), 3.37-3.31 (m, 2H), 3.14-2.93 (m, 6H), 1.73-1.64 (m, 2H), 0.82-0.77 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 170.88, 165.88, 135.99, 131.44, 130.80, 129.29, 127.18, 123.99, 123.49, 122.08, 119.59, 118.66, 111.28, 110.82, 87.37, 46.73, 28.25, 28.09, 19.98; LRMS (FAB) m/z 681 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C38H44N6O6 (M+): calculated 680.3322, found 680.3239. Preparation of Example 33
Figure imgf000072_0001
compound 22 compound 23 Il
Figure imgf000072_0002
compound 24 compound 25
Figure imgf000072_0003
Example 33
Scheme AG
[00216] Example 33 was prepared according to Scheme AG above. Compound 22 was synthesized according to the procedures described in Yang et ah, J. Org. Chem, 2001, 66,
7303-7312. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added to a flask containing dried Compound 22 (880 mg, 3.0 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of TFA (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature till Compound 22 was consumed. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the compound 23, which was used for next step without further purification.
[00217] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added to a flask containing compound 23 under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (0.53 g, 3.9 mmol), isobutylamine (0.3 mL, 3 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (900 mg, 4.5 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine, then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to afford Compound 24 as an oil (850mg , 93%),
[00218] To a solution of Compound 24 (850 mg, 3 mmol) in CH3OH (40 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (0.23 mL, 3.8 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of compound 25 and phthahydroazide as solid. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification
[00219] Freshly distilled DMF (30 mL) was added to a flask containing the mixture got in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (530 mg, 3.9 mmol), isophthalic acid (250 mg, 1.5 mmol), and finally EDCΗC1 (900 mg, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine and then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 33 (350 mg, 4 steps: 86%) as a white solid. Example 33 was characterized by the following data: [α]2°o +44.1° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 10.98 (s, 2H), 8.20-8.17 (m, 3H), 8.06 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.58 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 4.46 (m, 2H), 3.05-2.88 (m, 4H), 1.78-1.69 (m, 2H), 1.44 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 6H), 0.82 (t, J= 6.5 Hz, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CHCl3) δ 172.26, 166.19, 131.81, 131.29,129.50, 125.03, 82.72, 46.67, 28.26, 19.95, 17.59; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 451 (M++!, 17), 148 (100); HRMS (EI) for C22H34N4O6 (M+): calculated 450.2478, found 450.2478.
Preparation of Examples 34 and 35
Figure imgf000074_0001
Scheme AH
[00220] Example 34 and 35 were prepared according to Scheme AH above Compound
26 was synthesized according to the procedures described in Yoon et al., J. Org. Chem, 2000, 65, 7667-7675. Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (50 niL) was added to a flask containing compound 26 (1.18 g, 3 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (0.53 g, 3.9 mmol), isobutylamine (0.3 mL, 3 mmol), and finally EDCΗC1 (900 mg, 4.5 mmol). After being stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine and then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated to afford Compound 27 as an oil (1.2 g, 93%).
[00221] To a solution of Compound 27 (1.2 g, 2.7 mmol) in CH3OH (40 mL) was added NH2NH2-H2O (0.58 mL, 9.6 mmol). A white precipitate appeared after 1 hour. After stirred at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over with anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to provide a mixture of amine and phthahydroazide as solid. This mixture was immediately used in the next step without further purification.
[00222] Freshly distilled CH2Cl2 (30 mL) was added to a flask containing the mixture got in the last step under nitrogen atmosphere, followed by the addition of HOAt (530 mg, 3.9 mmol), isophthalic acid (225 mg, 1.35 mmol), and finally EDC-HCl (900 mg, 4.5 mmol). After stirred overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 and brine and then dried over with anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude oil was purified by flash column chromatography to afford Example 34 (688 mg, 4 steps: 30%) as a white solid. Example 34 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 11.04 (br, 2H), 8.26 (m, 3H), 8.05 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.61-7.50 (m, IH), 4.98 (br, 2H), 4.40-4.32 (m, 2H), 3.16-2.96 (m, 4H), 1.94-1.75 (m, 6H), 1.52-1.45 (m, 8H), 1.36 (s,18H), 0.92-0.85 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CHCla) δ 170.70, 166.28, 156.89, 131.56, 131.40, 129.27, 125.63, 86.42, 79.58, 46.64, 39.85, 30.59, 29.69, 28.36, 28.09, 21.80, 20.07.
[00223] Example 34 (270 mg, 0.35 mmol) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) In an ice bath, TFA (1 mL) was added dropwisely. 4 hours later, the reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotary evaporator and azeotroped with toluene 3 times to give the Example 35. Example 35 was characterized by the following data: 1H NMR (400 MHz, D2O) δ 7.94 (d, J= 1.6 Hz, IH), 7.87 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 7.86 (d, J= 7.9 Hz, IH), 7.60 (t, J= 7.9 Hz, IH), 4.49 (dd, J= 12.6, 6.4 Hz, 2H), 3.12-2.98 (m, 8H), 1.90-1.86 (m, 4H), 1.77-1.70 (m, 6H), 1.57-1.53 (m, 4H), 0.84-0.80 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, D2O) δ 172.43, 167.76, 131.25, 131.18, 129.63, 126.16, 85.36, 72.09, 46.60, 39.12, 30.16, 27.81,26.43, 21.29, 19.23, 19.20; LRMS (FAB) m/z 565 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C28H48N6O5 (M+): calculated 564.3635, found 564.3598.
Preparation of Example 36
°γ0H KHSO,, H2O °γ0H l5obutylamιne HOAt
Figure imgf000075_0001
Figure imgf000075_0002
n" IkA Example 36
Scheme AI [00224] Example 36 was prepared according to Scheme AI. L-Ser(tBu)-OH (1.61 g, 10 mmol) was dissolved in aqueous KHSO4 solution (2.04 g in 40 mL water). The solution was cooled to 00C, followed by addition of aqueous NaNO2 solution (1.04 g in 20 mL water) dropwisely during 30 minutes. Then stirring was continued overnight at room temperature. The solution was extracted with ethyl acetate 3 times and the combined organic phase was dried and concentrated to afford compound 28 (1.21 g, 75% yield) as a yellow oil, which can be used directly in the next step without further purification.
[00225] Compound 28 and isobutylamine (1.11 mL, 11.2 mmol) were dissolved in 50 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of HOAt (1.12 g, 8.25 mmol) and EDC-HCl (1.80 g, 9 mmol) successively. The solution was stirring for 5 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 29 (1.25 g, 77% yield) as colorless oil. [α]20o -13.8° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) £6.92 (br, IH), 4.14^.10 (m, IH), 3.64 (d, J= 4.2 Hz, IH), 3.60-3.58 (m, 2H), 3.17-3.08 (m, 2H), 1.80 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, IH), 1.21 (s, 9H), 0.93 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 6H); 13CNMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) £172.1, 74.0, 70.5, 63.1, 46.4, 28.5, 27.4, 20.0; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 217 (M+, 4), 131 (100); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C11H23NO3 (M+): calculated 217.1678, found 217.1666.
[00226] Compound 29 (1.09 g, 5.0 mmol), triphenylphosine (1.97 g, 7.5 mmol) and
N-hydroxyphthlalimide (0.98 g, 6.0 mmol) were dissolved in 50 mL dry THF. The solution was cooled to 00C, followed by addition of DEAD (1.31 g, 7.5 mmol) dropwisely in 5 minutes. Then the solution was stirring at room temperature for additional 2 hours. After concentration, the residue was purified by silica gel using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 30 (1.23 g, 68% yield) as colorless oil. [α]20 D +70.2° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) £7.86-7.78 (m, 4H), 7.69 (br, IH), 4.78 (dd, J= 3.6, 2.3 Hz, IH), 4.06 (dd, J= 10.7, 2.3 Hz, IH), 3.93 (dd, J= 10.7, 4.0 Hz, IH), 3.367-3.30 (m, IH), 3.05-3.00 (m, IH), 1.90 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, IH), 1.16 (s, 9H), 0.99 (dd, J= 6.6, 4.1 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ 167.4, 163.7, 134.8, 128.7, 123.8, 87.7, 73.6, 61.8, 46.7, 28.4, 27.2, 20.1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 362 (M+, 3.5), 144 (100); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for Ci9H26N2O5 calculated (M+): 362.1842, found 362.1833.
[00227] Compound 30 (362 mg, 1.0 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL MeOH. Then hydrazine hydrate (80% in water, 0.19 mL, 3.0 mmol) was added into the solution in one portion. After 2 hours (TLC showed complete conversion), MeOH and excessive hydrazine were removed in vacuum. The residue was suspended in ether/hexane (2:1, v/v); the white solid (phthalhydrazide, a byproduct of hydrozinolysis) was filtered off and washed with ether/hexane (2: 1, v/v). The filtrate was collected and concentrated to afford compound 31 (197 mg, 85% yield) as colorless oil which can be used in the next step without further purification.
[00228] Isophthalic acid (41.5 mg, 0.25 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 31 (116 mg, 0.5 mmol) in 5 mL CH2Cl2 followed by addition of HOAt (75 mg, 0.55 mmol) and EDC -HCl (120 mg, 0.6 mmol) successively. The solution was stirring for 10 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 32 (77 mg, 52% yield) as colorless foam. [α]20 D +27.5° (c 1.00, CHCI3); 1HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 10.70 (s, 2H), 8.30 (br, 2H), 8.16 (s, IH), 7.98 (d, J= 7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, IH), 4.53 (dd, J= 7.4, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 3.90 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, 2H), 3.74 (dd, J= 10.0, 8.0 Hz, 2H), 3.17-3.04 (m, 4H), 1.82 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, 2H), 1.20 (s, 18H), 0.91 (t, J= 6.4 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ 168.5, 165.7, 131.7, 131.3, 129.4, 125.3, 86.6, 74.4, 62.4, 46.7, 28.3, 27.4, 20.1; LRMS (FAB) m/z 595 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C30H50N4O8 (M+): calculated 594.3629, found 594.3620.
[00229] Compound 32 (77 mg, 0.13 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of 1 mL TFA. After 30 min (TLC showed complete conversion), solvents were removed under reduced pressure and the remaining solid was washed with CH2Cl2 and collected to afford compound 36 (31 mg, 50% yield) as a white powder. M.p. 174-176 0C; [α]20D +50.8° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-cfc) £ 12.29 (s, 2H), 8.31 (br, 2H), 8.1 (s, IH), 7.91 (d, J= 7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 4.33 (dd, J= 5.2, 3.2 Hz, 2H), 3.77 (dd, J= 12.2, 3.2 Hz, 4H), 2.95 (t, J= 6.4 Hz, 4H), 1.69 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, 2H), 0.80 (dd, J = 1.6, 6.2 Hz, 6H); 13CNMR (100 MHz, DMSO-rf6) «5168.9, 165.5, 132.0, 130.9, 129.6, 126.6, 87.6, 61.3, 46.3, 28.4, 20.2; LRMS (FAB) m/z 483 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C22H35N4O8 (M++H) calculated 483.2455, found 483.2451.
Preparation of Example 37
acid rt
Figure imgf000078_0001
Compound 33 Compound 34
Figure imgf000078_0002
Compound 35 Compound 36
Figure imgf000078_0003
Example 37
Scheme AJ
[00230] Example 37 was prepared according to Scheme AJ. Compound 33 (735mg, 2 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL MeOH, then hydrazine hydrate (80% in water, 0.5 mL, 6 mmol) was added into the solution in one portion. After 2 hours (TLC showed complete conversion), MeOH and excessive hydrazine were removed in vacuum. The residue was suspended in ether/hexane (2:1, v/v). The white solid (phthalhydrazide, a byproduct of hydrozinolysis) was filtered off and washed with ether/hexane (2:1, v/v). The filtrate was collected and concentrated to afford compound 34 (426 mg, 90% yield) which can be used in the next step without further purification .
[00231] Isophthalic acid (83 mg, 0.5 mmol) was added to a solution of 34 (237 mg, 0.5 mmol) in 5 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of HOAt (75 mg, 0.55 mmol) and EDC-HCl (120 mg, 0.6 mmol) successively. The solution was stirring for 10 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (10 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 35 (149 mg, 49% yield) as colorless syrup. [α]20 D +21.8° (c 1.00, CHCl3); 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) £9.79 (br, 2H), 8.09 (s, IH), 7.85 (d, J= 6.0 Hz, 2H), 7.45 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, IH), 7.30-7.20 (m, 10H), 4.79 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.21 (d, J= 6.0 Hz, 2H), 1.34 (s, 18H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) £175.9, 170.7, 138.0, 132.7, 131.2, 130.0, 129.5, 128.7, 127.8, 126.3, 84.2, 83.2, 37.8, 28.3; LRMS (FAB) m/z 605 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C34H40N2O8 (M+): calculated 604.2784, found 604.2794.
[00232] Compound 35 (121 mg, 0.2 mmol) was dissolved in 5 niL CH2Cl2, TFA (2 mL) was added in this solution. After 30 minutes (TLC showed complete conversion), solvents were removed in vacuum and the remaining compound 36 was used in the next step without further purification.
[00233] The crude compound 36 and isobutylamine (30 μL, 0.29 mmol) were dissolved in 5 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of HOAt (26 mg, 0.22 mmol) and EDCΗC1 (60 mg, 0.3 mmol) successively. The solution was stired for 10 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (40 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using acetone/CH2Cl2 as eluent to afford Example 37 (67 mg, 58% yield) as a white powder. M.p. 145-148 0C; [α]20 D +32.5° (c 1.00, CH3OH); 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 10.21 (br, 2H), 8.26 (t, J= 5.4 Hz, 2H), 7.77 (d, J= 7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.67 (s, IH), 7.40 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, IH), 7.30-7.20 (m, 10H)5 4.64 (dd, J= 7.2, 2.4 Hz, 2H), 3.23-2.87 (m, 8H), 1.68 (qui, J= 6.7 Hz, 2H), 0.78 (dd, J= 14.4, 6.6 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 171.0, 166.3, 137.3, 132.3, 131.2, 129.8, 128.9, 127.2, 124.9, 118.6, 87.5, 47.2, 39.0, 28.7, 20.4; LRMS (FAB) m/z 603 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) calculated for C34H43N4O6 (M++H) 603.3183, found 603.3181.
Preparation of Examples 38 & 39
Figure imgf000080_0001
Compound 39 Example 38
Figure imgf000080_0002
Example 39
Scheme AK
[00234] Example 38 & 39 were prepared according to Scheme AK. Compound 37 [prepared according to J. Org. Chem. 2000, 65, 7667] (335 mg, 1.0 mmol) was added in 30 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of HOAt (150 mg, 1.1 mmol) and EDC-HCl (240 mg, 1.2 mmol) successively with stirring. After 2 minutes, isobutylamine (105 μL, 1.05 mmol) was added dropwisely. The solution was stirring for 5 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 38 (355 mg, 91% yield) as a colorless syrup. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) J7.87-7.77 (m, 4H), 7.74 (br, IH), 4.97 (dd, J= 6.7 Hz, 4.2, IH), 3.24-3.17 (m, 3H), 3.01 (dd, J= 17.0, 6.8 Hz, IH), 1.90 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, IH), 1.45 (s, 9H), 0.99 (dd, J = 6.6, 4.6 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ 169.1, 167.9, 163.6, 134.9, 128.6, 123.9, 85.2, 81.5, 47.0, 38.2, 28.4, 28.0, 20.1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 390 (M+, 2.9), 147 (100); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C20H26N2O6 (M+): calculated 390.1791, found 390.1778.
[00235] Compound 38 (190 mg, 0.5 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL MeOH, then hydrazine hydrate (80% in water, 0.19 mL, 1.5 mmol) was added into the solution in one portion. After 2 hours (TLC showed complete conversion), MeOH and excessive hydrazine were removed in vacuum. The residue was suspended in ether/hexane (2:1, v/v). The white solid (phthalhydrazide, a byproduct of hydrozinolysis) was filtered off and washed with ether/hexane (2:1, v/v). The filtrate was collected and concentrated to afford compound 39 (111 mg, 85% yield) which can be used in the next step without further purification.
[00236] Isophthalic acid (33.2 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 39 (104 mg, 0.4 mmol) in 5 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of HOAt (60 mg, 0.44 mmol) and EDCΗC1 (100 mg, 0.5 mmol) successively. The solution was stirring for 10 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using acetone/CH2Cl2 as eluent to afford Example 38 (62 mg, 48% yield) as colorless foam. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) £10.60 (s, 2H), 8.75 (br, 2H), 8.18 (s, IH), 7.98 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (t, J= 7.7 Hz, IH), 4.74 (dd, J= 10.2, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 3.15-3.09 (m, 6H), 2.75 (dd, J= 17.6, 10.4 Hz, 2H), 1.84 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, 2H), 1.47 (s, 18H), 0.91 (dd, J= 10.8, 6.8 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (IOO MHz, CDCl3) £ 171.2, 169.3, 165.8, 131.4, 131.3, 129.5, 125.5, 84.0, 82.1, 46.9, 37.8, 28.3, 28.1, 20.1; LRMS (FAB) m/∑ (M++H) 651; HRMS (FAB) for C32H50N4Oi0 (M+) calculated 650.3527, found 650.3520. Deprotection of Example 38 in TFA/CH2C12 gave Example 39 in quantitative yield.
Preparation of Examples 40 and 41
Figure imgf000081_0001
* V-J.O-NPhth 0 Compound 42
Figure imgf000081_0003
Figure imgf000081_0004
Scheme AL [00237] Examples 40 and 41 were prepared according to Scheme AL. L-GIu-(OtBu)-OH (2.03 g, 10 mmol) was dissolved aqueous KHSO4 solution (2.04 g in 50 mL water). Then the solution was cooled to 00C, followed by addition aqueous NaNO2 solution (1.04 g in 20 mL water) dropwisely during 30 minutes. Then stirring was continued overnight at room temperature. The solution was extracted with ethyl acetate 3 times; the combined organic phase was dried and concentrated to afford crude compound 40 (1.21 g, 60% yield) as a yellow oil, which can be used directly in the next step without further purification.
[00238] The crude compound 40 (1.21 g) and isobutylamine (0.89 mL, 9.0 mmol) were dissolved in 60 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of HOAt (1.36 g, 10 mmol) and EDC-HCl (1.20 g, 6.0 mmol) successively. The solution was stirring for 5 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 41 (824 mg, 53%) yield as a colorless oil. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) <56.97 (br, IH), 4.72 (d, J= 4.4 Hz, IH), 4.14-4.10 (m, IH), 3.17-3.07 (m, 2H)5 2.51-2.44 (m, 2H), 2.20-2.11 (m, IH), 1.98-1.90 (m, IH), 1.79 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, IH), 1.45 (s, 9H), 0.92 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 176.5, 173.8, 81.9, 72.6, 46.7, 32.6, 29.6, 28.5, 28.4, 20.4; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) rø/z259 (M+, 2), 85 (100); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for Ci3H25NO4 (M+): calculated 259.1784, found 259.1783.
[00239] Compound 41 (777 mg, 3.0 mmol), triphenylphosine (1.18 g, 4.5 mmol) and N-hydroxyphthlalimide (587 mg, 3.6 mmol) were dissolved in 30 mL dry THF. Then the solution was cooled to 00C, followed by addition of DEAD (784 mg, 4.5 mmol) dropwisely in 5 minutes. Then the solution was stirring at room temperature for additional 2 hours. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 42 (812 mg, 67% yield) as colorless foam. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) S7.86-7.79 (m, 4H), 7.70 (br, IH), 4.73 (dd, J= 8.1, 4.0 Hz, IH), 3.30-3.21 (m, IH), 3.07-3.00 (m, IH), 2.69-2.62 (m, 2H), 2.41-2.30 (m, IH), 2.21-2.11 (m, IH), 1.87 (sept, J= 6.75 Hz, IH), 1.46 (ss 9H), 0.96 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) £169.9, 168.3, 164.6, 135.0, 128.9, 123.9, 87.4, 85.3, 46.9, 31.5, 28.5, 28.3, 27.9, 20.1; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 405 (M+, 3), 147 (100); HRMS (EI5 20 eV) for C2JH28N2O6 (M+): calculated 404.1947, found 404.1937.
[00240] Compound 42 (203 mg, 0.5 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL MeOH, then hydrazine hydrate (80% in water, 0.19 mL, 1.5 mmol) was added into the solution in one portion. After 2 hours (TLC showed complete conversion), MeOH and excessive hydrazine were removed in vacuum. The residue was suspended in ether/hexane (2:1, v/v). The white solid (phthalhydrazide, a byproduct of hydrozinolysis) was filtered off and washed with ether/hexane (2: 1, v/v). The filtrate was collected and concentrated to afford compound 43 (114 mg, 83% yield), which can be used in the next step without further purification.
[00241] Isophthalic acid (33.2 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 43 (110 mg, 0.4 mmol) in 5 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of HOAt (60 mg, 0.44 mmol) and EDCΗC1 (100 mg, 0.5 mmol) successively. The solution was stirred for 10 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using acetone/CH2Cl2 as eluent to afford Example 40 (64 mg, 47% yield) as colorless foam. 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) £10.79 (s, 2H), 8.32 (br, 2H), 8.18 (s, IH), 7.99 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (t, J- 7.7 Hz, IH), 4.42 (dd, J= 7.6 Hz, 3.4, 2H), 3.12-3.04 3 (m, 4H), 2.50-2.42 (m, 6H), 2.15-2.08 (m, 2H), 1.81 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, 2H), 1.43 (s, 18H), 0.89 (t, J= 6.2 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) £ 174.2, 170.4, 166.3, 132.0, 131.7, 129.8, 126.0, 86.5, 81.7, 47.2, 32.2, 28.7, 28.4, 26.9, 20.5; LRMS (FAB) m/z 679 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C34H54N4Oi0 (M+): calculated 678.3840, found 678.3852. Deprotection of Example 40 in TFA/CH2C12 gave Example 41 in quantitative yield.
Preparation of Example 42
Figure imgf000084_0001
Example 42
Scheme AM
[00242] Example 42 were prepared according to Scheme AM.
(S)-2-Acetoxy-4-(methylthio)-butyric acid [prepared according to the patent EP0338735] (960 mg, 5.0 mmol) and isobutylamine (0.75 mL, 7.5 mmol) were dissolved in 50 mL CH2Cl2, followed by the addition of HOAt (748 mg, 5.5 mmol) and EDC-HCl (1.2 g, 6.0 mmol) successively. The solution was stirred for 5 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 44 (902 mg, 73% yield) as colorless oil. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) £6.17 (br, IH), 5.25 (dd, J= 6.7, 5.5 Hz, IH), 3.13-3.09 (m, 2H), 2.57-2.52 (m, 2H), 2.19-2.12 (m, 5H), 2.10 (s, 3H), 1.81 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, IH), 1.21 (s, 9H), 0.93 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) £ 169.7, 169.1, 73.0, 46.5, 31.3, 29.5, 28.4, 21.0, 20.0, 15.4.
[00243] Compound 44 (742 mg, 3 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL MeOH, then followed by addition OfK2CO3 (830 mg, 6 mmol) and 1 mL water. After 5 hours (TLC indicated complete conversion), the solvents were removed in vacuum. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 45 (418 mg, 68% yield) as a colorless oil. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) £6.86 (br, IH), 4.30^1.27 (m, IH), 4.08 (br, IH), 3.17-3.08 (m, 2H), 2.70-2.64 (m, 2H), 2.18-2.13 (m, 4H)5 1.97-1.92 (m, IH), 1.80 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, IH), 0.92 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) £173.5, 71.8, 46.4, 32.9, 30.4, 28.5, 20.0, 15.4. LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z205 (M+, 20), 131 (100); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) for C9Hi9NO2S (M+): calculated 205.1137, found 205.1139.
[00244] Compound 45 (410 mg, 2.0 mmol), triphenylphosine (787 mg, 3.0 mmol) and N-hydroxyphthlalimide (392 mg, 2.4 mmol) were dissolved in 30 mL dry THF. Then the solution was cooled to 00C, followed by addition of DEAD (523 mg, 3.0 mmol) dropwisely in 5 minutes. Then the solution was stirred at room temperature for additional 2 hours. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane as eluent to afford compound 46 (435 mg, 62%) as colorless foam. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) £7.86-7.78 (m, 5H), 4.79 (dd, J= 7.8, 3.7 Hz, IH), 3.29-3.22 (m, IH), 3.08-3.02 (m, IH), 2.92-2.82 (m, 2H), 2.48-2.15 (m, 5H), 1.89 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, IH), 0.97 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) δ 169.7, 164.3, 135.5, 129.0, 124.3, 87.8, 85.8, 47.2, 32.7, 30.7, 28.8, 20.5, 15.6; LRMS (EI, 20 eV) m/z 350 (M+, 1) 148 (100); HRMS (EI, 20 eV) calculated for CnH22N2O4S (M+) 350.1300, found 350.1285.
[00245] Compound 46 (175 mg, 0.5 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL MeOH, then hydrazine hydrate (80% in water, 0.19 mL, 1.5 mmol) was added in one portion. After 2 hours (TLC showed complete conversion), MeOH and excessive hydrazine were removed in vacuum. The residue was suspended in ether/hexane (2: 1 , v/v); the white solid (phthalhydrazide, a byproduct of hydrozinolysis) was filtered off and washed with ether/hexane (2:1, v/v). The filtrate was collected and concentrated to afford compound 47 (90 mg, 83% yield), which can be used in the next step without further purification.
[00246] Isophthalic acid (33.2 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 47 (88 mg, 0.4 mmol) in 5 mL CH2Cl2, followed by addition of HOAt (60 mg, 0.44 mmol) and EDC (100 mg, 0.5 mmol) successively. The solution was stirred for 10 hours, then diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and washed successively with 5% KHSO4 (2 times), 10% NaHCO3 (2 times), and dried with Na2SO4. After concentration, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography using acetone/CH2Cl2 as eluent to afford Example 42 (60 mg 47% yield) as colorless foam. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) £11.03 (br, 2H), 8.33 (br, 2H), 8.16 (s, IH), 8.02 (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (t, J= 7.7 Hz, IH), 4.54 (dd, J= 8.1, 3.3 Hz, 2H), 3.07-2.97 (m, 4H), 2.75-2.65 (m, 4H), 2.20-1.98 (m, 10H), 1.76 (sept, J= 6.7 Hz, 2H), 0.89 (dd, J= 12.2, 6.6 Hz, 6H); 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3) «5171.4, 166.1, 132.1, 131.7, 129.9, 125.5, 86.6, 47.2, 31.8, 30.2, 28.1, 20.4, 15.5; LRMS (FAB) m/z 571 (M++H); HRMS (FAB) for C26H42N4O6S2 (M+): calculated 570.2546, found 570.2551.
Example 43 - pH-stat Fluorometric Transport Assay
[00247] This Example illustrates that the compound of Example 2 mediates chloride release when incorporated into liposomes. The liposome-based pH-stat fluorometric assay is an assay routinely used for identification of physiologically relevant ionophores, which are disclosed in (a) Deng, G.., Dewa, T. and Regen, S. L. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1996, 118, 8975; (b) Schlesinger, P. H., Ferdani, R., Liu, J., Pajewska, J., Pajewski, R., Saito, M., Shabany, H. and Gokel, G. W. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2002, 124, 1848; (c) Sidorov, V., Kotch, F. W.,
Abdrakhmanova, G, Mizani, R., Fettinger, J. C. and Davis, J. T. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2002, 124, 2267; (d) Sidorov, V., Kotch, F. W., Kuebler, J. L., Lam, Y.-F. and Davis, J. T. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2003, 125, 2840; and (e) Baumeister, B., Sakai, N. and Matile, S.Angew. Chem., Int. Ed. 2000, 39, 1955, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. For example, in this assay, a controlled amount of the base and potential ionophore is added to a suspension of liposomes containing a pH-sensitive dye, 8-hydroxypyrene-l,3,6- trisulfonate (HPTS, pyranine). The resulting pH gradient across the bilayer membrane causes the efflux of hydronium ions or the influx of hydroxide ions and builds up an electrostatic potential. This potential can be compensated by the efflux of anions or influx of cations (H+/M+ or OHV A" antiport and H4VA" or M+/0H" symport mechanisms are possible). If the compound of interest mediates such ion transport, the efflux of hydronium ions or the influx of hydroxide ions continues altering the intravascular pH and the fluorescence of the reporter dye.
[00248] Example 2-mediated chloride release was determined in large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs) of 100 nm average dimension, as reported in Sidorov, V., Kotch, F. W., Abdrakhmanova, G, Mizani, R., Fettinger, J. C. and Davis, J. T. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2002, 124, 2267. FIG. 5 shows that the application of Example 2 resulted in rapid, concentration-dependent exchange between extra- and intravesicular electrolytes. Importantly, Example 2 mediated electrolyte exchange with high anion selectivity. It mediated electrolyte exchange in the presence of chloride but not in the presence of sulfate (see FIG. 6). In contrast to the results shown in FIG. 6, where NaCl extra- and intravesicular buffers were used, no transport activity was detected in LUVs symmetrically loaded with Na2SO4. This anion-dependent activity is a strong evidence that Example 2 mediates chloride transport across the bilayer. FIG. 7 shows that in addition to Example 2, Examples 1 and 3-42 can also mediate chloride transport across lipid bilayers of chloride-containing liposomes with different efficiencies.
Example 44
[00249] Example 44 shows that the compound of Example 2 can function as a voltage-dependent chloride-selective channel when partitioned into lipid bilayers. Single-channel recording, using patch clamp techniques, is the most critical test for identifying ion channel formation, which is distinguished from other ion transport mechanisms such as ion carriers, and quantifying ion transport efficiency of a membrane channel. The channel-forming activity of Example 2 incorporated in lipid bilayers is examined using patch-clamp technique on giant liposomes. Characteristic single-channel currents were recorded with primary conductance of 54 pS in symmetric 0.2 M iV-methyl-glucamine hydrochloride (NMDG-Cl) solutions when application of Example 2 in bath solution (FIG. 8), indicating that Example 2 can partition into lipid bilayers of liposomes efficiently and thereby forms ionic channels.
[00250] The two key properties of ion channels in nature are ion selectivity, that is, a channel permits only certain ionic species to flow through its pore, and gating referring to the mechanism of channel opening and closing. The ion channels formed by Example 2 turned out to be anion selective and voltage-gated. There was no measurable change either in conductance or in reversal potential when NMDG-Cl in the bath solution was replaced by potassium chloride (KCl)5 suggesting that these channels are not permeable to K ions. The channel open probability (P0) and frequency were enhanced steeply upon increasing voltages of lipid bilayers within a physiologically relevant range of voltages, suggesting voltage-dependent gating (FIG. 8).
Example 45 [00251] Example 45 shows that the compound of Example 2 partitions into human cell membranes and dramatically increases cell chloride currents. The whole-cell configuration of the patch-clamp technique was used to examine the electrophysiological properties of the ionic currents induced by Example 2 in human embryonic kidney (HEK 293) cells. HEK 293 cell line originally obtained from the American Type Culture Collection, were cultured in DMEM supplemented with 10% FBS and 100 IU/ml penicillin G and 0.1 mg/ml streptomycin. Cells were grown at 370C in a 5% CO2 humidified incubator. Whole-cell chloride currents were recorded by using an EPC 9 patch clamp amplifier (HEKA Elektronik, Lambrecht/Pfalz, Germany) in voltage-clamp mode, controlled by Pulse/PulseFit 8.7 software (HEKA). Patch pipettes (resistance, 3-5 MΩ) were filled with a solution internal pipette solution containing CsCl 140, MgCl2 1 , HEPES 10, EGTA 5, Na2ATP 5 (in mmoI/L, pH 7.2 with CsOH). The bath solution contained NaCl 140, CsCl 5, CaCl2 1, MgCl2 1, HEPES 10 (in mmol/L, pH 7.4 with CsOH). After gigaohm seals were obtained, the membrane was ruptured with a pulsed negative pressure. Pipette and membrane capacitance were automatically compensated. Series resistance was typically compensated by 70 %. The cells were held at 0 mV and voltage steps ranging from -80 to +80 mV were applied for 800 ms in 20 mV step increments. All macroscopic currents were sampled at 50 kHz and filtered at 5 kHz, and data were analyzed with PulseFit (HEKA). Changes of Cl current were detected from the same cells before and after exposure to the bath solution containing Example 2 at the concentration of 50 nM. All experiments were performed at room temperature (22-250C)
[00252] At a low concentration of 50 nM, Example 2 caused a large increase in whole cell currents (FIG. 9), indicating that Example 2 may mediate Cl ions transport efficiently across cell membranes of HEK 293 cells. In addition, the induced currents were not reduced in the presence of a cellular anion transport inhibitor such as 4,4'-diisothiocyanatostilbene-2,2'-disulfonate (DIDS). This property rules out that Example 2 may increase whole cell currents by activating the natural chloride channels in HEK 293 cells and suggests that the synthetic chloride channels formed by Example 2 indeed accounts for the observed currents.
Example 46 [00253] Example 46 shows the chloride transport activity of the compound of Example 2 in liposome with chloride-sensitive fluorescent indicator SPQ.
[00254] Liposome preparation: Egg yolk L-α-phosphatidylcholine (EYPC, 91 mg, 120 μmol) was dissolved in a CHCl3MeOH mixture, the solution was evaporated under reduced pressure and the resulting thin film was dried under high vacuum for 3 hours. The lipid film was hydrated in 1.2 mL of solution A (200 mM NaNO3, 0.5 mM SPQ) for 2 hours. During hydration, the suspension was submitted to 5 freeze-thaw cycles (liquid nitrogen, water at room temperature). The large multilamellar liposome suspension (ImL) was submitted to high-pressure extrusion at room temperature (> 21 extrusions through a 0.1 μm polycarbonate membrane afforded a suspension of large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs) with an average diameter of 100 nm). The LUV suspension was separated from extravesicular dye by size exclusion chromatography (SEC) (stationary phase: Sephadex G-50, mobile phase: solution B: 20 mM NaNO3) and diluted with the solution B to give a stock solution with a lipid concentration of 10 mM (assuming 100% of lipid was incorporated into liposomes).
[00255] Fluorescent Assay : Typically, 100 μL of SPQ-loaded vesicles (stock solution) was suspended in 1.9 mL of solution C (200 mM NaCl) and placed into a fluorimetric cell. SPQ emission at 430 nm was monitored with excitation wavelengths at 360 nm. At 100 seconds, 20 μL of a 0.5 mM THF solution of Example 2 was added through an injection port. The results are shown in FIG. 10.
Example 47
[00256] Example 47 shows the X-ray crystallographic analysis of example 2. The X-ray crystal structure of Example 2 is shown in FIG. 11. The other X-ray crystallographic data and data collection method are shown below.
[00257] Data collection: A crystal of dimensions 0.4 x 0.35 x 0.1 mm mounted on a glass fibre was used for data collection at -200C on a MAR diffractometer with a 300 mm image plate detector using graphite monochromatized Mo-Kα radiation ( λ = 0.71073 A). Data collection was made with 2° oscillation step of φ, 15 minutes exposure time and scanner distance at 120 mm. One hundred images were collected. [00258] Crystal data: [C28 H46 N4 O6]; formula weight = 534.69, Orthorhombic, C 2 2 2,, a = 7.725(2) A, b = 18.967(4) A, c = 21.145(4) A, V = 3098.2(11) A3, Z = 4, D0 = I.146 g cm"3, μ(Mo-Kα) = 0.081 mm4, F(OOO) = 1160, T = 253 K.
Table 1. Crystal data and structure refinement for Example 2.
Empirical formula C28 H46 N4 O6
Formula weight 534.69
Temperature 253(2) K
Wavelength 0.71073 A
Crystal system Orthorhombic
Space group C 2 2 2,
Unit cell dimensions a = 7.725(2) A α= 90°. b = 18.967(4) A β= 90°. c = 21.145(4) A γ = 90°
Volume 3098.2(1 I) A3
Density (calculated) 1.146 Mg/m3
Absorption coefficient 0.081 mm"1
F(OOO) 1160
Crystal size 0.4 x 0.35 x 0.1 mm3
Theta range for data collection 1.93 to 25.35°.
Index ranges -7<=h<=7, -21<=k<=21, -24<=1<=24
Reflections collected 7174
Independent reflections 2039 [R(int) = 0.0498]
Completeness to theta = 25.35C 75.2 %
Absorption correction None
Refinement method Full-matrix least-squares on F2
Data / restraints / parameters 2039 / 2 / 185
Goodness-of-fϊt on F2 0.969
Final R indices [I>2sigma(I)J Rl = 0.0497, wR2 = 0.1217
R indices (all data) Rl = 0.0707, wR2 = 0.1310
Absolute structure parameter 1(2)
Largest diff. peak and hole 0.365 and -0.284 e.A"3
Example 48
[00259] The physiological behaviors and functions of the synthetic chloride channel formed by Example 2 in terms of its contributions to cell membrane potentials was investigated according to the following procedure. To avoid the interferences from natural ion channels, liposomes and artificial lipid bilayer vesicles were used as a model system to assess the capacity of Example 2 to vary membrane potential.
[00260] Referring to Fig. 12A, the egg yolk phosphatidylcholine (EYPC) liposomes containing sodium sulfate (Na2SO4) were suspended in an isotonic sodium chloride (NaCl) extravesicular solution with a membrane potential sensitive dye, i.e., safranin O. As shown in Fig. 12B, addition of Example 2 to the liposome suspensions induced a rapid increase in fluorescence intensity of safranin O, indicating the formation of stable negative charge inside liposomes. This may be due to the fact that Example 2 can only mediate chloride rather than sulfate or sodium ions transporting across lipid bilayers. While Example 2 mediated chloride ions flowing into the liposomes, the interiors of the liposomes become progressively more negative relative to the exteriors. Fig. 12C-12J shows that in addition to Example 2, Examples 10-42 can also modulate membrane potentials of liposomes with different efficiencies.
Example 49
[00261] The ability of Example 2 to modulate membrane potentials in polarized liposomes was investigated. In the assay as shown in Fig. 13 A, the EYPC-liposomes encapsulating potassium chloride (KCl) were suspended in an isotonic mixture of KCl and Na2SO4 solution to produce a transmembrane K+ concentration gradient. External addition of the selective K+ carrier valinomycin resulted in K+ efflux, which polarized the liposome by establishing an inside negative membrane potential. The assay was completed by the application of Example 2 and the membrane potential was monitored by changes of the fluorescence intensity of extravesicular safranin O. As shown in Fig. 13B, Example 2 rapidly depolarized the EYPC-liposomes. This depolarization process induced by Example 2 may be attributed to the formation of chloride channels by Example 2 that mediate chloride ions flow out of the polarized liposomes to balance the electrostatic potential established by valinomycin.
Example 50
[00262] To determine the potential of Example 2 for application in biological and medicinal science, Example 2 was investigated for incorporating into the plasma membranes of living cells and, thereby, modulating their membrane potentials by increasing chloride permeability of the cell membranes. A potential-sensitive dye tø-oxonal was used to measure the relative changes in membrane potential of the Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells, a model for the renal distal tubule and collecting duct that secrete chloride ions. An increase in fluorescence of δzs-oxonal indicated cell depolarization while a decrease indicated hyperpolarization. The treatment of MDCK cells with forskolin, an agonist of intracellular cyclic AMP that can activate CFTR chloride channels in the cells, produced a moderate increase in fluorescence of bis-oxona\ indicating depolarization of the cells (Fig. 14A). This depolarization effect could be ascribed to that the chloride equilibrium potential (Ea) was higher than the resting membrane potential in MDCK cells. Thus, the opening of chloride channels shifted the membrane potential towards the Ecu As expected, application of Example 2 also showed a similar depolarization effect on the membrane potential (Fig. 14B), which was consistent with the capacity of Example 2 to increase chloride permeability in MDCK cells by forming chloride channels. As shown in Fig. 14C, reducing extracellular chloride concentration elicited intracellular chloride efflux through a positive shift in the Ea and, therefore, depolarized the membrane potential. Interestingly, addition of Example 2 obviously facilitated this depolarization process by increasing cell chloride permeability. In addition, despite of the existence of a natural chloride channel blocker, diphenylamine-2-carboxylate (DPC), which entirely inhibited the depolarization effect induced by low-chloride extracellular solution, Example 2 depolarized the cells by restoring chloride permeability of the cell membranes (Fig. 14D and 14E). These results confirmed the ability of Example 2 to modulate membrane potentials of living cells through forming artificial chloride channels independent of natural ones.
[00263] In summary, FIG. 14A-E show the effects of adding different substances, including Example 2, on the membrane potential of Madin-Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cells. Membrane potentials of MDCK cells were monitored by the changes of emission intensity of the potential-sensitive dye bis-oxonol (DiBAC4(3)). The increase in the fluorescence intensity indicates depolarization. FIG. 14A shows that the addition of 10 μM foskolin resulted in significant depolarization of the membrane potential of MDCK cells. FIG. 14B shows the addition of 10 μM of Example 2 resulted in depolarization of the membrane potential of MDCK cells. FIG. 14C shows that the perfusing the MDCK cells with relatively low chloride (100 mM chloride) solution, assisted by addition of 10 μM of Example 2, resulted in slight depolarization of the membrane potential of MDCK cells. FIG. 14D shows that the addition of 1 mM DPC resulted in hyperpolarization of the membrane potential, and the subsequent addition of 10 μM of Example 2 resulted in a shift of the hyperpolarized membrane potential toward the original resting potential. FIG. 14E shows that perfusing the MDCK cells with low Cl" (60 mM Cl") Ringer's solution in the presence of 1 mM DPC did not result in depolarization of the membrane potential of MDCK cells, but subsequent addition of 10 μM Example 2 resulted in depolarization of such membrane potential. Each point in FIG. 14A-E represents the mean ± s.e. (n = 20-80 cells in 4-6 experiments).
Example 51
[00264] It is well known that the rise in intracellular Ca2+ triggers a variety of cellular functions, e.g., the release of neurotransmitters from nerve terminals and muscle contraction. The voltage-gated Ca2+ channels that mediate Ca2+ influx across the plasma membrane serve as one of important pathways to regulate the intracellular Ca2+ concentration ([Ca2+Ji) in vascular smooth muscle cells. The artificial chloride channel formed by Example 2 was investigated for regulating natural voltage-gated Ca2+ channels by modulating membrane potential in vascular smooth muscle cells. The rat thoracic aortic smooth muscle cell line A7r5 was used to elucidate the effect of Example 2 on the membrane potential and the [Ca2+J1 of vascular smooth muscle cells. As shown in Fig. 15A and 15B, the treatment of the smooth muscle cells with 60 mM K+ (high-K) extracellular solution strongly depolarized the membrane potential and stimulated a dramatic increase in the [Ca2+],, because high-K extracellular solution, through a positive shift in the K+ equilibrium potential (EK), could depolarize cell membrane potential to activate the voltage-gated L-type Ca2 channels, and therefore, could rise the [Ca2+],. However, the subsequent application of Example 2 in this high-K extracellular solution resulted in a slow decrease in the [Ca2+], to almost the original level (Fig. 15B), suggesting Example 2 may repolarize the cell membrane to deactivate the voltage-gated calcium channels. This assumed repolarization process was further confirmed by measuring cell membrane potential of A7r5 cells under the same experimental condition (Fig. 15A). This result suggested that the high-K extracellular solution depolarized the membrane potential to such extent that is not only high enough to activate the L-type Ca2+ channels but also much higher than the
Figure imgf000094_0001
of these cells. Consequently, Example 2 could increase the chloride permeability and thus shift the membrane potential back (i.e. repolarize the membrane potential) toward Ea that is likely lower than the activation potential of L-type Ca2+ channels in these cells. Furthermore, the prior application of Example 2 showed no obvious effect on both the membrane potential and the [Ca2+], of A7r5 cells, implying that the Ea was close to the resting membrane potential of the cells. In addition, the high-K induced effect on the membrane potential and the [Ca2+], was remarkably inhibited by the pretreatment of the cells with Example 2. This result revealed that through increasing chloride permeability, Example 2 could balance the depolarization effect elicited by the positively shifted E^.. Taken together, Example 2 may serve as the first synthetic ion channel that regulates[Ca2+], by modulating membrane potential in living cells.
[00265] FIG. 15A-B, 16A-B show the effects of Example 2 and 60 mM K+ extracellular solution (high-K+ solution) on regulating the membrane potential and the [Ca2+] of smooth muscle cells (A7r5 cells). It can be seen that the treatment of the A7r5 cells with high-K+ solution resulted in strong depolarization of the membrane potential (FIG. 15A) and a dramatic increase in the [Ca2+] (FIG. 15B). Subsequent addition of 10 uM of Example 2 resulted in repolarization of the membrane potential, as shown in FIG. 15 A, and a slow decrease in the [Ca2+] to almost the original level, as shown in FIG. 15B. Each point represents the mean ± s.e. (n = 20-80 cells in 4-6 experiments).
[00266] FIG. 16A-B show that the prior treatment of Example 2 on A7r5 cells resulted in no obvious depolarization effect nor change in the [Ca2+]. The subsequent addition of high-K+ solution resulted in a much weaker depolarization effect compared with those treated without the presence of Example 2, as shown in FIG. 15 A-B. Each point represents the mean ± s.e. (n = 20-80 cells in 4-6 experiments).
Example 52 [00267] Example 52 was for investigating whether Example 2 could promote vasorelaxation during vasoconstriction induced by depolarization. Mouse thoracic aortic rings was mounted in an organ bath apparatus and measured their muscular activity. Fig. 17A shows a typical experiment in which increasing the concentrations of Example 2 from 1 to 30 uM induced the complete relaxation of mouse aortic rings preconstricted by high-K solution. Example 2 produced concentration-dependent relaxation of preconstricted aortic rings with half-maximal relaxation value IC50 of 8.42 ±0.18 uM (n=5).
[00268] Example 52 was for investigating whether Example 2 could induce muscle contraction by activating α-adrenergic receptor. To verify that the vasorelaxant action of Example 2, Example 2 was tested to relax the mouse aortic rings constricted by the α-adrenergic receptor agonist phenylephrine (PE). Fig. 17B shows that Example 2 failed to relax these aortic rings (n = 4). This experiment indicated that Example 2 failed to reduce the [Ca2+], by blocking the voltage-gated Ca2 channels.
[00269] In addition to the effect of Example 2 on modulating membrane potential and regulating [Ca2+]b Example 2 may lead to relaxation of preconstricted mouse aortic rings by repolarizing membrane potential to deactivate voltage-gated Ca2+ channels in smooth muscle cells, paralleling with the proposed functional role played by cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator (CFTR) chloride channels in smooth muscle cells in controlling the vascular tone. This effect also underlies the possibility of using synthetic chloride channels to treat hypertension.
[00270] As demonstrated above, embodiments herein provide various self-assembling compounds which are useful for making ion-channel compositions and membranes comprising same. While this disclosure has been described with respect to a limited number of embodiments, the specific features of one embodiment should not be attributed to other embodiments of the invention. No single embodiment is representative of all aspects of the invention. In some embodiments, the compositions or methods may include numerous compounds or steps not mentioned herein. In other embodiments, the compositions or methods do not include, or are substantially free of, any compounds or steps not enumerated herein. Variations and modifications from the described embodiments exist. For example, the ion-channel compositions disclosed herein need not comprising only self-assembling compounds. It can comprise any type of compounds generally suitable for ion-channel compositions. It is noted that the methods for making and using the ion-channel compositions disclosed herein are described with reference to a number of steps. These steps can be practiced in any sequence. One or more steps may be omitted or combined but still achieve substantially the same results. The appended claims intend to cover all such variations and modifications as falling within the scope of the invention.
[00271] All publications and patent applications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. It is to be understood that this disclosure has been described in detailed by way of illustration and example in order to acquaint others skilled in the art with the invention, its principles, and its practical application. Further, the specific embodiments provided herein as set forth are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the disclosure, and that many alternatives, modifications, and variations will be apparent to those skilled in the art in light of the foregoing examples and detailed description. Accordingly, this disclosure is intended to embrace all such alternatives, modifications, and variations that fall within the spirit and scope of the following claims. While some of the examples and descriptions above include some conclusions about the way the compounds, compositions and methods may function, the inventors do not intend to be bound by those conclusions and functions, but put them forth only as possible explanations in light of current understanding.

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A method of modulating membrane potential of a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane; and
(b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
3. The method of any of claims 1-2, wherein the anion channel is a chloride channel.
4. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I):
X-HDA-^ Y (I) or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof, wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6;
Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon, carbocycle or heterocycle; and HDA is a divalent group having the formula (II), (III), (IIIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID),
(HIE), (IV) or (IVB):
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
wherein each of Z1 and Z2 is independently O, S or NR1; each of A, B2, and D is independently O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-Io alkylene; each of B!and B3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R1 and R2 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of Bl and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (III):
Figure imgf000098_0002
wherein k is an integer from 1 to 20;
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl;
B1 is O or NH; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
6. The method of claim 4, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula
(IV):
Figure imgf000098_0003
wherein D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
7. The method of claim 4, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
Figure imgf000099_0001
wherein A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or C]-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
8. The method of any of claims 4-7, wherein n of formula (I) is 1.
9. The method of any of claims 4-7, wherein n of formula (I) is 2 or 3, and at least two of the X-HDA units are the same.
10. The method of any of claims 4-7, wherein n of formula (I) is 2 or 3, and at least two of the X-HDA units are different.
11. The method of any of claims 4- 10, wherein X is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl.
12. The method of claim 11 , wherein X is hydrocarbyl or substituted hydrocarbyl comprising 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
13. The method of claim 12, wherein X is alkyl or substituted alkyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein X is isobutyl.
15. The method of any of claims 4-14, wherein Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted alkane, alkene or alkyne.
16. The method of claim 15, wherein Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted C2-I2 alkane, alkene or alkyne.
17. The method of claim 16, wherein Y is unsubstituted or substituted propylene or propenylene.
18. The method of any of claims 4-14, wherein Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic aromatic carbocycle.
19. The method of claim 18, wherein Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted benzene.
20. The method of any of claims 4-14, wherein Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic heterocycle.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein Y is a divalent or trivalent linking group formed by removing two or three hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted pyridine.
22. The method of any of claims 4-21 , wherein D is Ci-3 alkylene substituted with at least an alkyl, aryl, substituted alkyl or substituted aryl group.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein D is Ci-3 alkylene substituted with at least an isobutyl group.
24. The method of any of claims 4-23, wherein A is a bond; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1.
25. The method of any of claims 4-23, wherein A is O; D is methylene or substituted methylene; and k is 1.
26. The method of any of claims 4-14, wherein Y is arylene, heteroarylene, alkylene or alkenylene; and each X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl having 1 to 14 carbon atoms.
27. The method of any of claims 4-26, wherein D is methylene substituted with an isobutyl.
28. The method of claim 4, wherein the self-assembling compound is:
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000103_0001
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the self-assembling compound is
Figure imgf000104_0001
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
30. A method of regulating a natural voltage-dependent ion channel in a cell membrane comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the cell membrane;
(b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell; and
(c) regulating the natural voltage-dependent ion channel.
31. The method of claim 31 , wherein the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
32. The method of any of claims 30-32, wherein the anion channel is a chloride channel.
33. The method of any of claims 30-32, wherein the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent sodium ion channel, potassium ion channel or calcium ion channel.
34. The method of any of claims 30-32, wherein the natural voltage-dependent ion channel is a voltage-dependent calcium ion channel.
35. The method of any of claims 30-34, wherein the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I):
>X-HD*tY (I) or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof, wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6; Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon, carbocycle or heterocycle; and HDA is a divalent group having the formula (II), (III), (HIA), (IIIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE), (IV) or (IVB):
Figure imgf000105_0001
wherein each of Z1 and Z2 is independently O, S or NR1; each of A, B2, and D is independently O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-I0 alkylene; each of B!and B3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-1Q alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R1 and R2 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarby 1, carbocyclyl or heterocycly 1 and at least one of B 1 and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula
(III):
Figure imgf000105_0002
wherein k is an integer from 1 to 20;
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-10 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; B1 is O or NH; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
37. The method of claim 35, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV):
Figure imgf000106_0001
wherein D is Cj-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
38. The method of claim 35, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
Figure imgf000106_0002
wherein A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C MO alkylene where R2 is H5 acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
D is C]-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
39. The method of claim 35, wherein the self-assembling compound is
Figure imgf000106_0003
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
40. A method of regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of a cell comprising the steps of:
(a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the membrane of the cell; (b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell;
(C) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; and
(d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell.
41. The method of claim 40, wherein the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
42. The method of any of claims 40-41, wherein the anion channel is a chloride channel.
43. The method of any of claims 40-42, wherein the cell is a muscle cell.
44. The method of claim 43, wherein the cell is a smooth muscle cell.
45. The method of claim 44, wherein the cell is a vascular smooth muscle cell.
46. The method of any of claims 40-45, wherein the natural voltage-dependent calcium channel is L-type calcium channel.
47. The method of any of claims 40-46, wherein the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I):
V X-HDA-^ Y (I) or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof, wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6;
Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon, carbocycle or heterocycle; and
H0A is a divalent group having the formula (II), (III), (IHA)5 (HIB)5 (IIIC), (HID), (HIE), (IV) or (IVB):
Figure imgf000107_0001
Figure imgf000108_0001
wherein each of Z1 and Z2 is independently O, S or NR1; each of A, B2, and D is independently O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C]-]O alkylene; each of B^nd B3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-Io alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R1 and R2 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of B 1 and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
48. The method of claim 47, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula
(III):
Figure imgf000108_0002
wherein k is an integer from 1 to 20;
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted CMO alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl;
B1 is O or NH; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
49. The method of claim 47, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV):
Figure imgf000109_0001
wherein D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
50. The method of claim 47, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
Figure imgf000109_0002
wherein A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
51. The method of claim 47, wherein the self-assembling compound is
Figure imgf000109_0003
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
52. A method of regulating the tension of a muscle cell comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the membrane of the muscle cell;
(b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the muscle cell;
(c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel;
(d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the muscle cell; and (e) regulating the tension of the muscle cell.
53. The method of claim 52, wherein the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
54. The method of any of claims 52-53, wherein the anion channel is a chloride channel.
55. The method of any of claims 52-54, wherein the muscle cell is a smooth muscle cell.
56. The method of claim 55, wherein the muscle cell is a vascular smooth muscle cell.
57. The method of any of claims 52-56, wherein the natural voltage-dependent calcium channel is L-type calcium channel.
58. The method of any of claims 52-57, wherein the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I):
( X-HDA-^ Y (I) or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof, wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6; Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon, carbocycle or heterocycle; and
HDA is a divalent group having the formula (II), (III), (IHA), (IHB), (HIC), (HID), (HIE), (IV) or (IVB):
Figure imgf000110_0001
wherein each of Z1 and Z2 is independently O, S or NR1; each of A, B2, and D is independently O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci.io alkylene; each of B 'and B3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci.io alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R! and R2 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of Bl and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
59. The method of claim 58, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (III):
Figure imgf000111_0001
wherein k is an integer from 1 to 20;
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Cj.io alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl;
B1 is O or NH; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
60. The method of claim 58, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV):
Figure imgf000111_0002
wherein D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
61. The method of claim 58, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
Figure imgf000112_0001
wherein A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci.io alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
62. The method of claim 58, wherein the self-assembling compound is
Figure imgf000112_0002
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
63. A method of regulating a vascular tone comprising the steps of: (a) forming a synthetic anion channel in the membrane of a vascular smooth muscle cell;
(b) shifting the membrane potential toward the equilibrium potential of the anion in the cell;
(c) regulating a natural voltage-dependent calcium channel; (d) regulating the intracellular calcium concentration of the cell;
(e) regulating the tension of the vascular smooth muscle cell; and
(f) regulating the vascular tone.
64. The method of claim 63, wherein the cell membrane comprises a lipid bilayer.
65. The method of any of claims 63-64, wherein the anion channel is a chloride channel.
66. The method of any of claims 63-65, wherein the natural voltage-dependent calcium channel is L-type calcium channel.
in
67. The method of any of claims 63-66, wherein the synthetic anion channel is formed by a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I):
( X HDA )n Y (I)
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof, wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6;
Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon, carbocycle or heterocycle; and
HDA is a divalent group having the formula (II), (III), (HIA), (IHB), (HIC), (HID),
(HIE), (IV) or (IVB):
Figure imgf000113_0001
wherein each of Z1 and Z2 is independently O, S or NR1; each of A, B2, and D is independently O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-Io alkylene; each of B'and B3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-1Q alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R1 and R2 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of B1 and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
68. The method of claim 67, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula
(III):
Figure imgf000114_0001
wherein k is an integer from 1 to 20;
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl;
B1 is O or NH; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
69. The method of claim 67, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV):
Figure imgf000114_0002
wherein D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
70. The method of claim 67, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
Figure imgf000114_0003
wherein A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-10 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Ci-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
71. The method of claim 67, wherein the self-assembling compound is
Figure imgf000115_0001
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
72. A method of treating, managing or preventing a human disease that is related to the abnormal membrane potential responses, the method comprising administering a plurality of molecules of a self-assembling compound having formula (I):
/n (I)
Or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof, wherein X is an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl; n is an integer from 1 to 6; Y is a monovalent, divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent linking group formed by removing one, two, three, four, five and six hydrogen atoms respectively from an unsubstituted or substituted hydrocarbon, carbocycle or heterocycle; and
HDA is a divalent group having the formula (II), (III), (LU A), (HIB), (IIIC), (HID), (HIE), (IV) or (IVB):
Figure imgf000115_0002
wherein each of Z1 and Z2 is independently O, S or NR1; each of A, B2, and D is independently O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted C1-1O alkylene; each of B1 and B3 is independently a bond, O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted d-io alkylene; and k is an integer from 1 to 20, where each of R1 and R2 is independently H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl and at least one of Bl and B2 of formula (II) is NH.
73. The method of claim 72, wherein the disease is hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features, generalised epilepsy with febrile seizures (GEFS+), generalised epilepsy with febrile and afebrile seizures, paramyotonia congenita, potassium-aggravated myotonia hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis or Brugada syndrome.
74. The method of claim 72, wherein the disease is hypertension, autosomal-dominant long-QT syndrome with deafness, autosomal-reccessive long-QT syndrome, benign familial neonatal convulsions, Long-QT syndrome, or Long-QT syndrome with dysmorphic features.
75. The method of claim 72, wherein the self-assembling compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or stereoisomer thereof is inserted into the lipid bilayer of a cell of a mammal.
76. The method of claim 75, wherein the mammal is a human.
77. The method of claim 72, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (III):
Figure imgf000116_0001
wherein k is an integer from 1 to 20;
A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or unsubstituted CMO alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl;
B1 is O or NH; and D is Ci-3 alkylene or C]-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
78. The method of claim 72, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IV):
Figure imgf000117_0001
wherein D is C1-3 alkylene or C1-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
79. The method of claim 72, wherein HDA of formula (I) is represented by formula (IVB):
Figure imgf000117_0002
wherein A is O, S, NR2 or a substituted or imsubstituted Ci-I0 alkylene where R2 is H, acyl, hydrocarbyl, carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl; and
D is Ci-3 alkylene or Cj-3 alkylene substituted with one or more hydrocarbyl or heterocyclyl.
80. The method of claim 72, wherein the self-assembling compound is
Figure imgf000117_0003
or a salt, solvate, polymorph or stereoisomer thereof.
PCT/CN2008/002027 2007-12-19 2008-12-18 Method of modulating membrane potential of a cell WO2009089680A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP08871016.5A EP2231137B1 (en) 2007-12-19 2008-12-18 Method of modulating membrane potential of a cell
CN200880127474.5A CN102170872B (en) 2007-12-19 2008-12-18 Method of modulating membrane potential of a cell

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US1518907P 2007-12-19 2007-12-19
US61/015,189 2007-12-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009089680A1 true WO2009089680A1 (en) 2009-07-23

Family

ID=40789389

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2008/002027 WO2009089680A1 (en) 2007-12-19 2008-12-18 Method of modulating membrane potential of a cell

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US9610263B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2231137B1 (en)
CN (1) CN102170872B (en)
WO (1) WO2009089680A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013024170A1 (en) 2011-08-18 2013-02-21 Basf Se Carbamoylmethoxy- and carbamoylmethylthio- and carbamoylmethylamino benzamides for combating invertebrate pests
WO2013024169A1 (en) 2011-08-18 2013-02-21 Basf Se Carbamoylmethoxy- and carbamoylmethylthio- and carbamoylmethylamino benzamides for combating invertebrate pests
WO2013024171A1 (en) 2011-08-18 2013-02-21 Basf Se Carbamoylmethoxy- and carbamoylmethylthio- and carbamoylmethylamino benzamides for combating invertebrate pests
EP3432873A4 (en) * 2016-03-22 2020-01-08 Parvizi Surgical Innovation, LLC Compositions and methods for determining the presence of active leukocyte cells using an electrochemical assay
US11104933B1 (en) 2016-03-22 2021-08-31 Cleu Diagnostics, Llc Compositions and methods for determining the presence of active leukocyte cells using an electrochemical assay

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012118216A1 (en) * 2011-02-28 2012-09-07 独立行政法人理化学研究所 Auxin biosynthesis inhibitor
CN110573598A (en) * 2016-12-12 2019-12-13 索邦大学 Thermal thickening compound for non-polar liquids
CN111518025B (en) * 2020-05-07 2023-05-23 湖南科技学院 Application of bipyridine bisamide as organic artificial ion channel monomer

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008074227A1 (en) * 2006-12-19 2008-06-26 Versitech Limited Synthetic ion channels

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5151513A (en) * 1988-04-29 1992-09-29 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. N-heterocyclic alcohol derivatives
US5667962A (en) * 1996-03-18 1997-09-16 Case Western Reserve University Pyruvate thiolester for the prevention of reperfusion injury
US6261836B1 (en) 1996-10-01 2001-07-17 Geron Corporation Telomerase
JP3641143B2 (en) 1998-09-01 2005-04-20 日清オイリオグループ株式会社 Benzenecarboxylic acid amide compounds and organic liquid gelling or solidifying agents
WO2003059937A2 (en) 2002-01-14 2003-07-24 Washington University Synthetic ion channels
EP1364941A1 (en) 2002-05-22 2003-11-26 Applied NanoSystems B.V. Gelling agents
ATE479700T1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2010-09-15 Univ Cape Town ANGIOTENSIN I-CONVERTING ENZYME (ACE) INHIBITORS

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008074227A1 (en) * 2006-12-19 2008-06-26 Versitech Limited Synthetic ion channels

Non-Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ABO-GHALIA M. ET AL.: "Synthesis and investigation of a new cyclo (N-dipicolinoyl) pentapeptide of a breast and CNS cytotoxic activity and an ionophoric specificity", AMINO ACIDS., vol. 26, 2004, pages 283 - 289, XP008110022, DOI: doi:10.1007/s00726-003-0042-8 *
BOSE PARTHA PRATIM ET AL.: "Formation of triple helical nanofibers using self-assembling chiral benzene- 1,3,5-tricarboxamides and reversal of the nanostructure's handedness using mirror image building blocks", CHEMICAL COMMUNICATION, 2006, pages 3196 - 3198, XP003020722, DOI: doi:10.1039/b606371c *
HASSAN SAAD S. M. ET AL.: "New lead (II) selective membrane potentiometric sensors based o hiral 2,6-bis-pyridinecarboximide derivatives", TALANTA, vol. 60, no. 1, 2003, pages 81 - 91 *
HASSAN SAAD S. M. ET AL.: "Novel thiocyanate-selective membrane sensors based on di-, tetra- and hexa-imidepyridine ionophores", ANALYTICA CHIMICA ACTA, vol. 482, 2003, pages 9 - 18, XP008110021, DOI: doi:10.1016/S0003-2670(03)00172-7 *
XIANG LI ET AL.: "A small synthetic Molecule Forms Chloride Channels to Mediat hloride Transport across Cell Membranes", J. AM. CHEM. SOC., vol. 129, no. 29, 2007, pages 7264 - 7265, XP008137768 *

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013024170A1 (en) 2011-08-18 2013-02-21 Basf Se Carbamoylmethoxy- and carbamoylmethylthio- and carbamoylmethylamino benzamides for combating invertebrate pests
WO2013024169A1 (en) 2011-08-18 2013-02-21 Basf Se Carbamoylmethoxy- and carbamoylmethylthio- and carbamoylmethylamino benzamides for combating invertebrate pests
WO2013024171A1 (en) 2011-08-18 2013-02-21 Basf Se Carbamoylmethoxy- and carbamoylmethylthio- and carbamoylmethylamino benzamides for combating invertebrate pests
EP3432873A4 (en) * 2016-03-22 2020-01-08 Parvizi Surgical Innovation, LLC Compositions and methods for determining the presence of active leukocyte cells using an electrochemical assay
US11104933B1 (en) 2016-03-22 2021-08-31 Cleu Diagnostics, Llc Compositions and methods for determining the presence of active leukocyte cells using an electrochemical assay

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20090163595A1 (en) 2009-06-25
EP2231137A1 (en) 2010-09-29
EP2231137B1 (en) 2017-01-25
CN102170872B (en) 2014-08-27
US9610263B2 (en) 2017-04-04
EP2231137A4 (en) 2011-04-06
CN102170872A (en) 2011-08-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2231137B1 (en) Method of modulating membrane potential of a cell
TWI569814B (en) Fat-soluble vitamin compounds for targeting drug delivery and enhancing sirna activity
US8378138B2 (en) Synthetic ion channels
EP3183006B1 (en) Quinolinium conjugates of cyclosporin
KR20110016891A (en) Nmda receptor antagonists for the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders
JP2013536178A (en) Arylsulfonamide derivatives, compositions, and methods of use
KR20140014081A (en) Dipeptide analogs for treating conditions associated with amyloid fibril formation
CN108349911B (en) Nitric oxide releasing prodrug molecules
US20180140582A1 (en) Benzothiazolone compound
JP2011231094A (en) Bumetanide, furosemide, piretanide, azosemide, and torsemide analogs, composition and method of use
US7129208B2 (en) Synthetic ion channels
US9162977B2 (en) Synthetic ion channels
DK2890687T3 (en) Salts of benzothiazolone compound as beta-2-adrenoceptor agonist
US20190270705A1 (en) Fine-tune modulators of neuronal excitability for neuropsychiatric disorders
WO2020159441A1 (en) Compounds for use as proton channels and methods thereof
RU2793806C1 (en) 2-substituted 5-(hetero)alkyl-6-hydroxypyrimidine-4(1h)-ones with nootropic activity
CN107286114B (en) Brain-targeted prodrug of AMPA receptor synergist and medical application thereof
CA3127480A1 (en) Novel non-opioid anti-pain medication
CA3168937A1 (en) Naphthoquinone-based chalcone derivatives and uses thereof
TW316234B (en)
BRPI0910391A2 (en) PROSTACYCLINE RECEPTOR MODULATING COMPOUNDS (PGI2), CRYSTALLINE FORM OF THE COMPOUNDS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, USES OF THE SAME AND PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF THE COMPOSITION

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200880127474.5

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08871016

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2008871016

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008871016

Country of ref document: EP